SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for...

186
REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND STRUCTURES Section 02 41 13.13 - 1 White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022 Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018 SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND STRUCTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removing concrete paving, asphaltic concrete pavement, brick pavement and base courses. B. Removing concrete curbs, concrete curbs and gutters, sidewalks and driveways. C. Removing pipe culverts, sewers, and sewer leads. D. Removing existing inlets and manholes. E. Removing and disposing of pre-stressed concrete beams and drill shafts. F. Removing miscellaneous structures of concrete or masonry. G. Removing existing bridge. 1.2 REGULARTORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for disposal of debris. B. Coordinate removal work with utility companies. PART 2- PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Obtain advance approval from ENGINEER for dimensions and limits of removal work. B. Identify known utilities below grade. Stake and flag locations. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect following from damage or displacement: 1. Adjacent public and private property. 2. Trees, plants, and other landscape features designated to remain. 3. Utilities designated to remain. 4. Pavement and utility structures designated to remain.

Transcript of SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for...

Page 1: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND STRUCTURES Section 02 41 13.13 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 02 41 13.13 – REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND STRUCTURES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Removing concrete paving, asphaltic concrete pavement, brick pavement and base courses.

B. Removing concrete curbs, concrete curbs and gutters, sidewalks and driveways.

C. Removing pipe culverts, sewers, and sewer leads.

D. Removing existing inlets and manholes.

E. Removing and disposing of pre-stressed concrete beams and drill shafts.

F. Removing miscellaneous structures of concrete or masonry.

G. Removing existing bridge.

1.2 REGULARTORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable codes for disposal of debris.

B. Coordinate removal work with utility companies.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Obtain advance approval from ENGINEER for dimensions and limits of removal work.

B. Identify known utilities below grade. Stake and flag locations.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect following from damage or displacement:

1. Adjacent public and private property.

2. Trees, plants, and other landscape features designated to remain.

3. Utilities designated to remain.

4. Pavement and utility structures designated to remain.

Page 2: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND STRUCTURES Section 02 41 13.13 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

5. Bench marks, monuments, and existing structures designated to remain.

3.3 REMOVALS

A. Remove pavements and structures by methods that will not damage underground utilities. Do not use

drop hammer near existing underground utilities.

B. Minimize amount of earth loaded during removal operations.

C. Where existing pavement is to remain, make straight saw cuts in existing pavement to provide clean

breaks prior to removal. Do not break concrete pavement or base with drop hammer unless concrete or

base has been saw cut to minimum depth of 2 inches.

D. When street and driveway saw cut location is greater than one-half of pavement lane width, remove

pavement for full lane width or to nearest longitudinal joint as directed by ENGINEER.

E. Remove sidewalks and curbs to nearest existing dummy, expansion, or construction joint.

F. Where existing end of pipe culvert or end of sewer is to remain, install 8-inch-thick masonry plug in

pipe end prior to backfill in accordance with requirements of Section 02316 Structural Excavation and

Backfill.

3.4 BACKFILL

A. Backfill of removal areas shall be in accordance with requirements of Section 02316 Structural

Excavation and Backfill.

3.5 DISPOSAL

A. Inlet frames, grates, and plates; and manhole frames and covers, may remain OWNER property.

Disposal shall be in accordance with applicable local, state and federal laws.

B. Remove from site, debris resulting from work under this section in accordance with applicable local,

state and federal laws.

END OF DOCUMENT

Page 3: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CONCRETE FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES Section 03 10 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, include General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes formwork, shoring, re-shoring, back-shoring, falsework, bracing, and other temporary

supports required to form and support all Cast-in-Place concrete shown on the Drawings.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Specification Section 01400 “Quality Control” for requirements of material testing and

inspection.

2. Specification Section 01410 “Testing Laboratory Services” for inspection requirements

associated with forming and accessories.

3. Specification Section 03 20 00 “Concrete Reinforcing” for reinforcements associated with

Cast-in-Place Concrete.

4. Specification Section 03 30 00 “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for Cast-in-Place concrete and

related products.

5. Specification Section 04 20 00 “Unit Masonry” for reinforcements associated with Unit

Masonry and related products.

6. Specification Section 05 12 00 “Structural Steel Framing” for placement of embedded steel

anchors and plates in Cast-in-Place concrete.

7. Specification Section 05 21 00 “Steel Joist Framing” for placement of embedded steel

anchors, plates and joist seats in Cast-in-Place concrete.

8. Specification Section 05 31 00 “Steel Decking” for placement of steel anchors in steel

decking.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010

(Reapproved 2015).

B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.

C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata 2017).

D. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014.

E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018.

Page 4: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CONCRETE FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES Section 03 10 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.4 RESPONSIBILTY

A. The design, construction, and safety of all formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All

forms, shores, re-shores, back-shores, falsework, bracing, and other temporary supports shall be

engineered to support all loads imposed including the wet weight of concrete, construction equipment,

live loads, lateral loads due to wind and wet concrete imbalance. The Contractor shall also be

responsible for determining when temporary supports, shores, re-shores, back-shores, and other

bracing may be safely removed.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 “Submittals” for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties.

D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Formwork drawings shall be submitted for Owner’s record and reviewed

by the Engineer for conformance to structure drawing layout only. Such shop drawings shall indicate

types of materials, sizes, lengths, connection details, design allowance for construction loads, anchors,

form ties, shores, braces, construction joints, reveals, camber, openings, formwork coatings and all

other pertinent information in ACI 347.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver prefabricated forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging.

B. Store prefabricated forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from

moisture.

C. Protect plastic foam products from damage and exposure to sunlight.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMWORK - GENERAL

A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in-place

concrete work.

B. Design and construct concrete that complies with design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions.

C. Chamfer outside corners of beams, joists, columns, and walls.

Page 5: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CONCRETE FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES Section 03 10 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.2 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, 1

½-inch back break dimension, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in

concrete surface.

B. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or

discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and form

materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied.

1. Composition: Colorless reactive, mineral oil-based, soy-based, or vegetable-oil based

compound.

2. Do not use materials containing diesel oil or petroleum-based compounds.

3. VOC Content: In compliance with applicable local, State, and federal regulations.

4. Products:

a. SpecChem, LLC; Bio Strip WB (water-based): www.specchemllc.com/sle.

b. W. R. Meadows, Inc; Duogard: www.wrmeadows.com/sle.

C. Dowel Sleeves: Plastic sleeve and nailable plastic base for smooth, round, steel load-transfer dowels.

D. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, at least 22 gage, 0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) thick, foam filled,

release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork.

E. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, at least 22 gage, 0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) thick, longest possible

lengths, with alignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to

concrete formwork.

F. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and

character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.

G. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 05 12 00 “Structural

Steel”.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with

drawings.

3.2 ERECTION - FORMWORK

A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements

of ACI 301.

B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to

overstressing by construction loads.

Page 6: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CONCRETE FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES Section 03 10 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

C. Install permanent insulated foam panel formwork per manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during

stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.

E. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.

F. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings.

G. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to

formwork.

H. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement,

request instructions from Architect before proceeding.

3.3 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT

A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.

3.4 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS

A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work.

B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.

C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses,

sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.

D. Position recessed anchor slots for brick veneer masonry anchors to spacing and intervals specified in

Section 04 20 01.

E. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and

plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.

F. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous without

displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight.

3.5 FORM CLEANING

A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.

B. Clean and protect permanent insulated concrete foam panel formwork per manufacturer's

recommendations.

C. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.

Page 7: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CONCRETE FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES Section 03 10 00 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that

water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.

2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do

not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within

heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.

3.6 FORMWORK TOLERANCES

A. Construct permanent insulated foam panel formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400 –

“Quality Requirements”.

B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork

design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.

C. Do not reuse wood formwork more than two (2) times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do

not patch formwork.

3.8 FORM REMOVAL

A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight

and imposed loads.

B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces

scheduled for exposure to view.

C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged

forms.

END OF SECTION

Page 8: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND
Page 9: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CONCRETE REINFORCING Section 03 20 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 1, 2018

SECTION 03 20 00 – CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to work of this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work of this Section includes labor, materials, hardware, equipment, transportation and services

required to fabricate and place all reinforcement for Cast-in-Place concrete including bars, welded wire

fabric, ties and supports shown on the Drawings and as specified.

B. Related Sections:

1. Specification Section 03 10 00 “Concrete Forming and Accessories”

2. Specification Section 04 20 00 “Unit Masonry”

1.3 REFERENCES

Comply with all provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards except where more

stringent requirements are shown or specified.

A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.

B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata 2017).

C. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; 2004.

D. ASTM A1094/A1094M - Standard Specification for Continuous Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.

E. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement; 2016.

F. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 2009a

(Reapproved 2014).

G. ASTM A704/A704M - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete

Reinforcement; 2017.

H. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.

I. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement; 2016.

Page 10: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CONCRETE REINFORCING Section 03 20 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 1, 2018

J. ASTM A996/A996M - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.

K. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017.

L. ASTM D3963/D3963M - Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy-

Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2015.

M. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; 2011.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 – “Submittals”, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Shop drawings and samples for all reinforcing steel and related accessories shall be submitted

for Engineer’s approval.

2. Shop drawings shall show layout, bending and assembly diagrams, bar schedules, stirrup

spacing, splicing and laps of bars and shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 301.

1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Perform all tests and inspections specified in Laboratory Testing Section of these Specifications.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi) and Grade 40. See Drawings.

1. Plain billet-steel bars

2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767/A767M, Class I.

3. ASTM A706/A706M, deformed low-alloy steel bars.

4. Deformed bars, ASTM A996/A996M Grade 40 (280), Type A.

B. Welded Wire Fabric:

1. Welded smooth wire fabric

2. Welded deformed wire fabric

3. All welded wire fabric shall be furnished in flat sheets only.

C. Tie Wire:

1. Annealed steel tie wire, minimum 16-gauge

2. Plastic coated or stainless-steel tie wire in concrete structures and all architectural concrete.

Page 11: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CONCRETE REINFORCING Section 03 20 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 1, 2018

D. Support for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and

other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place.

Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI recommendations.

2.2 RE-BAR SPLICING

A. Splice Type and Lap Lengths: Required slice type and lap lengths are defined on the Drawings. Lap

splice lengths for unscheduled bars not shown otherwise on the Drawings shall be 40 bar diameters

minimum.

PART 3 - EXECCUTION

3.1 FABRICATION

A. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of indicated sizes and accurately form to shapes and lengths

indicated and required by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending.

Bars with kinks or bends not scheduled will be rejected.

3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Marking and Shipping: Bundle reinforcement and tag with suitable identification to facilitate sorting

and placing.

B. Transport and store at site so as not to damage material. Keep sufficient supply of tested, approved and

proper reinforcement at the site to avoid delays.

C. Maintain reinforcing bars free of mud, dirt, grease or other coatings.

3.3 PLACEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel

1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials which reduce

or destroy bond with concrete.

2. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement.

a. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection.

b. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in

position during concrete placement. Do not deviate from required position.

c. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete

surfaces.

3. Install welded wire fabric in a long lengths as practicable.

a. Lap adjoining pieces at least one (1) full mesh plus 2-inches and lace splice with

wire.

b. Off-set laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

c. Welded fabric shall be furnished and placed in flat sheets only.

4. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.

Page 12: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CONCRETE REINFORCING Section 03 20 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 1, 2018

5. Extend reinforcement continuous through construction joints or, if approved on the shop

drawings, provide dowels of sufficient length to develop the full tension or compression

strength of the bar as applicable.

6. Accommodate placement of formed openings.

a. Place additional reinforcing steel at all sleeves and openings in beams, slabs and

walls as specified in the Drawings.

b. Where reinforcement is interrupted by sleeves or openings not shown on the

drawings, consult with Engineer for instructions for placing and splicing of bars.

c. Provide required additional reinforcing steel at no additional cost to Owner.

B. Welded Wire Fabric

1. Wherever welded wire fabric is specified as reinforcement in slabs, it shall be continuous and

properly lapped one full wire spacing plus 2-inches across the entire concrete surface and not

interrupted by beam or girders.

3.4 REINFORCING STEEL SPACING

A. Parallel Reinforcement:

1. Distance between parallel bars in a layer shall be not less than the bar diameter nor 1-inch.

2. Where parallel reinforcement is placed in two (2) or more layers, bars in upper layer shall be

placed directly above bars in the lower layer with clear distance between layers of not less

than 1-inch.

3.5 SPLICING

A. Lap splices in reinforcing steel shall be contact lap splices unless otherwise detailed on drawings.

B. Maintain proper coverage between reinforcing bars at splices.

C. Lap unscheduled reinforcing bars not otherwise specified a minimum of 40 bar diameter at splices.

3.6 SHRINKAGE AND TEMPERATURE REINFORCEMENT

A. Provide shrinkage and temperature reinforcement at right angles to main top and bottom bars for all

structural slabs unless detailed otherwise on Drawings.

1. See Drawings for sizes and spacings.

END OF SECTION

Page 13: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

EPOXY RELATED WORK Section 03 21 16 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 03 21 16 – EPOXY RELATED WORK

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this Section.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

Installation of epoxy grouted dowels or reinforcing steel, and bonding fresh concrete to hardened

concrete. Such work shall be done by the Contractor in strict conformance to these specifications.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicable Standards

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM C881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for

Concrete

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

ACI 503 R-93 Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete

ACI 503.1-92 Standard Specification for Bonding, Hardened Concrete, Steel, Wood,

Brick, and Other Materials to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component

Epoxy Adhesive

ACI 503.2 Standard Specification for Bonding Plastic Concrete to Hardened Concrete

with a Multi-Component Epoxy Adhesive

ACI 503.3 Standard Specification for Producing a Skid-Resistant Surface on Concrete

by the Use of Multi-Component Epoxy System

ACI 548.14-14 Standard Specification for Repairing Concrete with Epoxy Mortars

B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Companies furnishing the epoxy materials shall have a proven track

record of at least five years. Furthermore, they shall have in existence a program of training, certifying

and supporting a nationally organized program of approved contractors. Evidence of this shall be made

available to the Engineer/Architect upon request

C. Contractor’s Qualifications: Contractor performing the work shall be an approved contractor by the

manufacturer furnishing the epoxy materials and shall have no less than five years’ experience in the

various types of epoxy related work required in this project. A notarized certification from the

manufacturer attesting to the training shall be submitted to the Engineer/Architect along with the

proposal to do the work.

Page 14: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

EPOXY RELATED WORK Section 03 21 16 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EPOXY MATERIALS

A. All epoxy material shall be new and manufactured within the shelf life limitations set forth by the

manufacturer.

B. Epoxy shall be a two-part epoxy adhesive material and shall be of epichlorohydrin/amine type.

Polysulphide epoxies are not acceptable.

C. Epoxy used shall be insensitive to the presence of water and moisture and shall be capable of

application and of strength development even when applied to damp surfaces having a temperature of

40° or above.

D. Epoxy used shall develop a minimum strength of 2000 psi in tension and 4000 psi in compression at

the end of seven days.

E. Epoxies used shall not deteriorate under approximately 200 freeze thaw cycles.

F. Epoxies used shall be 100% solids without solvents.

G. Bonding and strength characteristics of epoxies shall be stable when exposed to ultraviolet rays

2.2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EPOXY MORTARS

A. Epoxy mortar used for bonding, patching, and resurfacing, shall have the following additional

properties:

1. Epoxy mortar shall be non-sagging.

2. Sand used in preparing mortar shall be graded oven dry quartzite and furnished in bags.

3. The epoxy mortar patch material shall match the existing texture and color of exposed

concrete without giving a blotchy appearance. A test patch shall be applied for approval prior

to final acceptance of the mortar. Size of test patch shall be approximately equal to the size of

the average mortar patch to be used on the project.

2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENTITIOUS MORTARS

A. Mortar used for bonding, patching, and resurfacing in exposed or exterior environmental conditions

with large cyclic temperature changes shall have the following properties:

1. Mortar shall be non-sagging.

2. Coefficient of thermal expansion shall be comparable with that of concrete (5.5 x 10-6

in/in/°F).

3. Sand used in preparing mortar shall be graded oven dry quartzite furnished in bags.

4. The mortar patch material shall match the existing texture and color of exposed concrete

without giving a blotchy appearance. A test patch shall be applied for approval prior to final

acceptance of the mortar. Size of test patch shall be approximately equal to the size of the

average mortar patch to be used on the project.

Page 15: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

EPOXY RELATED WORK Section 03 21 16 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.4 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Epoxy Injection Work

1. Master Builders Technologies: Concresive 1380

2. E-Poxy Industries: Eva-Pox Injection Resin No. 4

3. Rescon Tehcnology Corp: Product R303, Concrete Injection Resin

4. Sika Chemical Corporation: Sikadur Hi-Mod LV or Sikadur 52 Injection Resin

5. Thermal-Chem, Inc.: Thermal-Chem Injection Resin, Product No. 2

6. Hilti: HIT HY 150/HIT-ICE, HIT RE500

B. Epoxy Mortar Patch

1. Master Builders Technologies: Concresive 1411 or 1482.

2. E-Poxy Industries: Eva-Pox Mortar Mix No. 3

3. Rescon Technology Corp.: Product No. R616, Concrete Bonder or Product No. R404, Epoxy

Mortar Resin.

4. Sika Chemical Corporation: Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel or Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV.

5. Thermal-Chem, Inc.: Thermal-Chem Mortar Resin Product No. 3, Thermal-Chem Fibrous

Mortar Resin, Product No. 306 or Thermal-Chem Mortar Resin Gel, Product No. 304.

C. Epoxy for Bonding Fresh Concrete to Hardened Concrete

1. Master Builders Technologies: Concresive Liquid (LPL) or Concressive 3007.

2. E-Poxy Industries: Eva-Pox Fresh Concrete Bonder No. 2.

3. Rescon Technology Corp.: Product R649, Fresh Concrete Bonder.

4. Sika Chemical Corporation: Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod.

5. Thermal-Chem, Inc.: Thermal-Chem Wet Concrete Bonder, Product No. 5 or 501.

D. Epoxy for Grouting Bolts, Dowels or Reinforcing Steel

1. Master Builder Technologies: Concressive Liquid (LPL), Concressive 3007, Concressive

Paste (LPL) for horizontal use in conditioned spaces.

2. E-Poxy Industries: Eva-Pox Cold Cure Bonder No. 41.

3. Rescon Technology Corp.: Product No. R606, Concrete Bonder.

4. Sika Corporation: Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel, (horizontal use); Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod or Sikadur 35

Hi-Mod LV (vertical use).

5. Thermal-Chem, Inc.: Thermal-Chem Bonder, Product No. 4, Normal Cure or Rapid Cure.

6. Hilti: HIT RE500

Substitutions may be considered provided complete technical information and job references are

furnished to the Architect/Engineer and approved prior to commencement of work.

Changes in products required to suit temperature and environmental conditions at the time of epoxy

application shall be specified as separate line items by the Contractor showing credit or additions to the

price for the various tasks.

In using the above products, follow strictly the manufacturer's specifications and directions for mixing

and application. Also heed all label warnings by manufacturer. Make application in accordance with

applicable safety laws.

Page 16: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

EPOXY RELATED WORK Section 03 21 16 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EPOXY MORTAR

A. Applicators Qualifications

1. Epoxy mortar repair work shall only be performed by contractors who have successfully used

this process on at least three similar structural repairs of equal scope which have performed

successfully for a minimum period of five years.

2. Only adequately trained and experienced personnel shall be used on the job.

B. Surface Preparation

1. Concrete surface to which the epoxy mortar is to be applied shall be exposed parent concrete

free of loose and unsound materials. Surface preparation shall be done by abrasive blasting,

waterblasting or as otherwise required by the manufacturer.

2. Necessary approvals shall be obtained by the Contractor from authorizing governmental or

other agencies prior to abrasive blasting. Abrasive blasting operations shall comply with the

requirements of OSHA and NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health)

Standard PB-246-697.

3. Surfaces shall be free of any deleterious materials such as laitance, dust, dirt, and oil.

4. Any exposed reinforcing steel shall also be cleaned and be free of rust and other

contaminants. Cleaning shall be accomplished by mechanical means. Use powered wire

brushes in locations where reinforcing steel cannot be cleaned by abrasive-blasting or water-

blasting. All exposed reinforcing steel shall be coated with a corrosion inhibiting product

specified elsewhere in this specification prior to mortar application.

5. Prime the cleaned surface with primer as required by the manufacturer.

C. Concrete Surface Inspection

1. Ensure that the surface temperature is at least 40°F to permit wetting of concrete surface by

epoxy coating.

2. The Contractor shall evaluate the moisture content of concrete surface receiving epoxy

mortar. This shall be done by determining if moisture will collect at bond lines between

concrete and epoxy mortar before epoxy has cured. Evaluate this by taping a piece of

polyethylene sheet to the concrete. If moisture collects on underside of the polyethylene sheet

before epoxy would cure, then allow concrete to dry sufficiently to prevent the possibility of

moisture between old concrete and new epoxy.

D. Mortar Application

1. Condition epoxy compound components to a temperature between 65°-80°F unless otherwise

recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxies beyond this range of temperature shall not be

used.

2. Stir each of the two parts of epoxy separately before mixing. Then mix in a clean container

free of contaminants.

3. Thoroughly blend epoxy components and sand with Jiffy mixers (made by The Jiffy Mixer

Co., Irvine, California) to a uniform and homogenous mixture. Small batches of one quart or

less may be mixed by spatulas, palette knives or similar devices.

4. Mixing should be accomplished well within the pot life of epoxy (three minutes when using

Page 17: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

EPOXY RELATED WORK Section 03 21 16 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

Jiffy mixer or five minutes when mixed by hand) after allowing for time required for

application.

5. Apply mortar by trowel or other means suitable for the consistency of the epoxy-sand mortar

mix.

6. Build up the repair area in layers with mortar thicknesses within those specified by the

manufacturer (1/4" maximum per layer).

7. Consolidate the mortar thoroughly to remove entrapped air.

8. Finish surface of mortar to match the texture and contours of existing concrete.

9. Allow mortar to cure in accordance to manufacturers recommendations.

E. Cleanup

1. Protect surfaces surrounding the work areas against spillage.

2. Epoxy and epoxy mortar spillages shall be cleaned before they set and become difficult to

remove.

3. Cleanup all portions of the existing structure that are soiled or stained in the process of epoxy

mortar repair work.

3.2 EPOXY GROUTED BOLTS, DOWELS OR REINFORCING STEEL

A. Applicator’s Qualifications

1. Epoxy grouting of bolts, dowels, or reinforcing steel shall only be performed by contractors

who have had successful experience on a minimum of three (3) projects of similar scope.

2. Only adequately trained epoxy applicators shall be used on the job. Furnish current certificate

of training on request.

B. Surface Preparation

1. All bolts, dowels and reinforcing bars shall be abrasive blasted no more than eight hours

before the grouting. If evidence of oxidation exists on the surface, the bolts, reinforcing bars

and dowels shall be recleaned. Blast-clean surfaces using Steel Structures Painting Council,

Surface Preparation No. 6, to give a surface condition corresponding to ASa2, BSa2, CSa2 of

SSPC Vis 1, depending on the initial surface condition of the steel surface. Prior to blast-

cleaning, clean surfaces to conform to SSPC SP1, SP2, and SP3, as required.

2. All holes shall be clean of dust, debris, and contaminants. Use compressed air from an oil-

and-water-free compressed air source prior to epoxy application.

C. Drilling Holes for Embedment

1. Use only rotary-percussion type drills for drilling holes.

2. Drills shall be fitted with bits having single tooth that produce large cuttings, and hollow stem

drill rods that permit simultaneous blowing of compressed air providing immediate expulsion

of the cuttings from the hole.

3. Do not cut through any reinforcing steel unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Use

small diameter exploratory holes to detect presence of reinforcing steel prior to drilling holes

for grouting.

4. Core drilling equipment, and electric impact hammers or other tools which do not provide for

immediate expulsion of the drill cuttings shall not be used.

Page 18: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

EPOXY RELATED WORK Section 03 21 16 - 6

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

5. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, depth of hole used for embedding the bolts, bars or

dowels shall be at least fifteen times their diameter.

6. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, the center to center distance between the embedded

bolts, bars or dowels shall be at least twelve times their diameter.

7. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, the edge distance shall be at least six times the

diameter of the bolt, bar or dowel.

8. Hole diameter shall normally be 1/4" larger than the outside diameter of the embedded item.

In no case shall the hole diameter be 3/8" larger than the diameter of the embedded item.

D. Epoxy Application

1. Condition epoxy compound materials at a temperature between 65°-80°F unless otherwise

recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxies beyond this range of temperature shall not be

used.

2. Mix epoxy materials in a clean container free of contaminants.

3. Thoroughly blend epoxy components with mechanical mixers to a uniform and homogenous

mixture. Mix small batches (up to 1 quart) by use of spatulas, palette knives, or similar

devices. Take care to use proper proportions of the epoxy components when using small

batches.

4. Mixing shall be accomplished well within the pot life of the epoxy after allowing for time

required for application.

5. Partially fill the hole with epoxy. Then insert the bolt, dowel or reinforcing bar into the hole

such that the resin material oozes out around the embedded item, ensuring complete contact.

Twist the bolt, dowel or bar slightly as it is inserted in the hole to ensure complete contact.

6. As an alternative to inserting the embedded item after the epoxy is poured in the hole, the

bolt, dowel, or bar may be positioned in the hole and filled up with epoxy by hand caulking

guns or injected with in-head mixing equipment. In either case, the nozzle shall be provided

with a hose or tube of sufficient length to reach the bottom of the hole being filled.

7. Where the holes are horizontal or overhead, the opening shall be covered by a masking or a

duct tape. Make a split in the tape and insert the epoxy injection tube through the split. Fill

hole completely with epoxy and then insert the embedded item through the split tape. Amount

of epoxy should be such that a small amount of material oozes through the split. Twist the

bolt, dowel or bar slightly as it is inserted in the hole to ensure complete contact.

8. Do not apply epoxy in the rain or in the presence of standing water.

E. Cleanup

1. Protect surfaces surrounding the work area against spillage.

2. Epoxy oozed out from the holes and spillages shall be cleaned before they become difficult to

remove.

3. Cleanup whatever portions of the existing structure are soiled or stained in the process of

grouting the bolts, dowels, or reinforcing bars.

END OF SECTION

Page 19: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Concrete formwork.

B. Concrete building frame members.

C. Concrete reinforcement.

D. Joint devices associated with concrete work.

E. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, equipment pits, light pole bases, flagpole

bases, thrust blocks, and manholes.

F. Concrete curing.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.

B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

C. Section 03 35 11 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Densifiers, hardeners, applied coatings, and polishing.

D. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw cut

joints and isolation joints in slabs.

E. Section 07 95 13 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.

B. ACI 302.1R - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2015.

C. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000 (Reapproved

2009).

D. ACI 305R - Guide to Hot Weather Concreting; 2010.

E. ACI 306R - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting; 2016.

F. ACI 308R - Guide to External Curing of Concrete; 2016.

Page 20: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with

specified requirements and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including

admixtures, patching compounds, epoxies, grouts, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-

shake finish materials, hardeners, sealers and others as requested by Architect/Engineer.

1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility

with floor covering adhesives.

2. For chemical-resistant waterstops, provide data on ASTM D471 test results.

B. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.

1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - Concrete

Mixtures.

2. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 - Concrete

Quality, Mixing and Placing.

3. Indicate proposed mix design complies with fiber reinforcing manufacturer's written

recommendations.

C. Samples

1. Samples for Pigment Color Selection: Submit manufacturer's complete sample chip set,

including pigment number and required dosage rate for each color.

2. Verification Samples: Submit sample chips of specified colors indicating pigment numbers

and required dosage rates, for subsequent comparison to installed concrete.

3. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.

4. Samples: Submit two, 12 inch (305 mm) long samples of waterstops and construction joint

devices.

D. Laboratory Test Reports

1. Test Reports: Submit report for each test or series of tests specified.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, indicate installation procedures and

interface required with adjacent construction.

F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components

that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and

registered with manufacturer.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.

B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.

Page 21: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

D. For slabs required to include moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA), do not proceed with

placement unless manufacturer's representative is present for every day of placement.

1.6 MOCK-UP

A. Construct and erect mock-up panel for architectural concrete surfaces indicated to receive special

treatment or finish as result of formwork.

B. Accepted mock-up panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work. Keep mock-up exposed

to view for duration of concrete work.

C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMWORK

A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347R to provide formwork that

will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi) and Grade 40. See Drawings.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I - Normal Portland type.

1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source.

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M.

1. Acquire aggregates for entire project from same source.

C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330/C330M.

D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.

E. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N.

F. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1.

G. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete.

Page 22: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Sheet material complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by

manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The

use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited.

1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.

2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic,

prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.

B. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement,

water reducing and plasticizing agents.

1. Grout: Comply with ASTM C1107/C1107M.

2. Height Change, Plastic State; when tested in accordance with ASTM C827/C827M:

a. Maximum: Plus 4 percent.

b. Minimum: Plus 1 percent.

3. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours, ASTM C109/C109M: 2,000 pounds per square

inch (13.7 MPa).

4. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,000 pounds per square inch (13.7 MPa).

5. Products containing aluminum powder are not permitted.

6. Low-Slump, Dry Pack Products:

C. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Moisture-insensitive, two-part; consisting of epoxy resin, non-metallic

aggregate, and activator.

1. Composition: High solids content material exhibiting positive expansion when tested in

accordance with ASTM C827/C827M.

a. Maximum Height Change: Plus 4 percent.

b. Minimum Height Change: Plus 1 percent.

2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 7 days, ASTM C579: 12,000 pounds per square inch

(82.7 MPa).

D. Termite-Resistant Barrier Sealant: See Division 31 Specification Section 31 31 16 “Termite Control”.

E. Architectural Concrete Floor Topping and Resurfacer:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days, ASTM C109/C109M: 6,500 pounds per square

inch (45 MPa).

2.5 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS

A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type

II.

B. Epoxy Bonding System:

1. Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application.

Page 23: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

C. Acetate Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable polyvinyl acetate.

D. Silane Hybrid Anchoring System:

1. Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application.

E. Waterproofing Admixture Slurry: Slurry coat of Portland cement, sand, and crystalline waterproofing

additive, mixed with water in proportions recommended by manufacturer to achieve waterproofing at

cold joints in concrete.

F. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion during

placement.

G. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top

section that will form 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep sealant pocket after removal.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin-film-forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss caused by

high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediately after concrete

placement.

B. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-forming compound;

complying with ASTM C309.

C. Curing Agent, Water Replacement Type: Clear, water based, liquid water cure replacement agent

complying with ASTM C309 standards for water retention, and with ACI 302.1R.

D. Curing and Anti-Spalling Compound: Boiled linseed oil compound.

E. Wax Curing Compound: Water-based liquid, white pigmented, membrane-forming.

F. Resin Curing Compound: Solvent-based liquid, white pigmented, membrane-forming.

1. For use on exterior slabs. When slab will be painted, sealed, topped, or receive other applied

finish, completely remove curing compound after curing is complete and before finish

coatings are applied.

G. Curing and Sealing Compound, Moisture Emission Reducing: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear

sealer, for application to newly placed concrete; capable of providing adequate bond for flooring

adhesives, initially and over the long term; with sufficient moisture vapor impermeability to prevent

deterioration of flooring adhesives due to moisture emission.

1. Use this product to cure and seal all slabs to receive adhesively applied flooring or roofing.

2. Comply with ASTM C309 and ASTM C1315 Type I Class A.

3. VOC Content: Less than 100 g/L.

4. Solids Content: 25 percent, minimum.

H. Curing Compound, Non-dissipating: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing acrylic;

complying with ASTM C309.

Page 24: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 6

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

I. Curing and Sealing Compound, Low Gloss: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing acrylic;

complying with ASTM C1315 Type 1 Class A.

J. Curing and Sealing Compound, High Gloss: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing acrylic;

complying with ASTM C1315 Type 1 Class A.

K. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171.

L. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D2103, 4 mil, 0.004 inch (0.102 mm) thick, clear.

M. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.

2.8 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.

B. Proportioning Structural Lightweight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.2 recommendations.

C. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field

experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.

1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for

preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

D. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended or

required by manufacturer.

E. Normal Weight Concrete:

1. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.

2. Maximum Aggregate Size: 5/8 inch (16 mm).

2.9 MIXING

A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685/C685M. Mix each

batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.

1. Colored Concrete: Add pigments in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to

achieve consistent color from batch to batch.

2. Fiber Reinforcement: Batch and mix as recommended by manufacturer for specific project

conditions.

B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.

Page 25: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 7

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.

B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form

accessories.

C. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by

cleaning and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions.

1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing

applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required.

2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.

D. Where new concrete with integral waterproofing is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare

surfaces to be treated in accordance with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions. Saturate cold joint

surface with clean water, and remove excess water before application of coat of waterproofing

admixture slurry. Apply slurry coat uniformly with semi-stiff bristle brush at rate recommended by

waterproofing manufacturer.

E. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert

steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.

F. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6

inches (150 mm). Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended

products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before

covering.

3.3 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.

B. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.

C. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test

samples taken.

D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will

not be disturbed during concrete placement.

Page 26: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 8

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

E. Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where construction

joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing laitance and exposing the

sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure water jetting.

3.4 SLAB JOINTING

A. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.

B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.

C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height

equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.

3.5 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES

A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00, will inspect finished slabs for

compliance with specified tolerances.

B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness:

1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 feet (3 m).

2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 feet (3 m).

3. Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 feet (3 m).

C. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.

D. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring

corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.

3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.

B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more in

height.

C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6 mm) or

more in height. Provide finish as follows:

1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not

more than 24 hours after form removal.

2. Grout Cleaned Finish: Wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture by brush or spray;

scrub immediately to remove excess grout. After drying, rub vigorously with clean burlap,

and keep moist for 36 hours.

D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:

Page 27: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 9

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI 302.1R; thick

floor coverings include quarry tile, ceramic tile, and Portland cement terrazzo with full bed

setting system.

2. Decorative Exposed Surfaces: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R; use steel-reinforced

plastic trowel blades instead of steel blades to avoid black-burnish marks; decorative exposed

surfaces include surfaces to be stained or dyed, pigmented concrete, surfaces to receive liquid

hardeners, surfaces to receive dry-shake hardeners, surfaces to be polished, and all other

exposed slab surfaces.

E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100

nominal.

F. Concrete Polishing: See Section 03 35 11.

3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from

premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary

for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period.

D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:

1. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep

continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-

fog spray, or saturated burlap.

2. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00

- Quality Requirements.

B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.

C. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same

conditions as concrete it represents.

D. Slab Testing: Cooperate with manufacturer of specified moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA)

to allow access for sampling and testing concrete for compliance with warranty requirements.

3.9 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within

24 hours of test.

Page 28: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 10

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not complying with required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or

specified requirements.

C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of

additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.

D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of

Architect for each individual area.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.

3.11 SCHEDULE - CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHES

A. Foundation Walls: 3,000 pounds per square inch (20.7 MPa) 28 day concrete, form finish with

honeycomb filled surface.

B. Underside of Supported Floors and Structure Exposed to View: 4,000 pounds per square inch (27.6

MPa) 28 day concrete, form finish with honeycomb filled surface.

END OF SECTION

Page 29: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING Section 03 35 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 03 35 00 – CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Finishing scheduled rooms to receive stained and sealed concrete floor finish. See Room Finish

Schedule.

B. Surface treatment with dust proofing sealer.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03 30 00 – “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating,

troweling, and similar operations; curing.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ACI 301 – Structural Concrete for Buildings

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 “Submittals”.

B. Product Data: Provide data on finishing compounds, product characteristics, compatibility and

limitations.

C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate criteria for preparation and application.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of Section 01600 “Materials and

Equipment”.

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s packaging, including application instructions.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Concrete Stain: Lithochrome Chemstain as manufactured by L.M. Scofield Company.

B. Floor Sealers: See Room Finish Schedule.

Page 30: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING Section 03 35 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1. Euclid – Super Diamond Clear

2. Euclid – Everclear

3. Euclid – Diamond Hard

C. Additives: HC SharkGrip – Slip resistant additive for designated floor sealer top coat.

D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 “Materials and Equipment”.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify site conditions under Section 01400 “Quality Control”

B. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the Work of this Section.

3.2 FLOOR FINISHING

A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Steel trowel surfaces which will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring and thin set

ceramic tile.

C. Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed.

D. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at wall; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at ⅛-inch

per foot.

3.3 STAINED AND SEALED FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT INSTALLATION

(Floors scheduled as stained concrete)

A. Fill all holes, crevices, spaces and disintegrated areas.

B. Allow concrete to cure for 28-days. Wet cure. Do not install curing compound.

C. Clean all dirt, grit, dust or oil from surface.

D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendation.

E. Apply two (2) coats of concrete stain. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.

F. Apply one (1) or two (2) coats as scheduled of floor sealer. Mix and apply in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendation.

Page 31: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING Section 03 35 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.4 CONCRETE SEALER, FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT INSTALLATION

(Floors scheduled as sealed concrete)

A. Fill all holes, cervices, spaces and disintegrated areas.

B. Allow concrete to cure for 28-days.

C. Clean all dirt, grit, dust or oil from surface.

D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.

E. Apply one (1) or two (2) coats of sealer as scheduled. Mix and apply in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendation.

3.5 SCHEDULE OF FLOOR FINISH TYPES

A. Sealed Concrete Floors / Patios

1. TYPE 1: Restrooms/Concessions:

a. Sealed with one (1) coat of Euclid Diamond Hard

2. TYPE 2: Interior Service Areas and Stained Concrete Floors

a. Sealed with two (2) coats of Euclid Diamond clear (semi-gloss)

Page 32: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND
Page 33: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04 29 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 04 29 00 – REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Concrete Block.

B. Mortar and Grout.

C. Reinforcement and Anchorage.

D. Flashings.

E. Lintels.

F. Accessories.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; 2016.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware;

2016a.

C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement; 2016.

D. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 2009a

(Reapproved 2014).

E. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017.

F. ASTM C140/C140M - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and

Related Units; 2017a.

G. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2018.

H. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006 (Reapproved

2011).

I. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011.

J. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for

Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2017.

K. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition.

Page 34: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04 29 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, and mortar and grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules,

reinforcement supporting and spacing devices, and accessories.

C. Design Data: Indicate required mortar strength, unit assembly strength in each plane, and supporting

test data.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with provisions of TMS 402/602, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract

documents.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and

contamination by other materials.

B. Handle and store ceramic glazed masonry units in protective cartons or trays. Do not remove from

protective packaging until ready for installation.

C. FIELD CONDITIONS

D. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of TMS 402/602 or applicable

building code, whichever is more stringent.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT MASONRY - GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable codes for all components.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:

1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 by 8 inches (400 by 200 mm) and

nominal depth of 8 inches (200 mm), 10 inches or 12 inches.

2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners.

Page 35: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04 29 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Mortar:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I.

a. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

B. Grout:

1. Comply with ASTM C476 for grout.

a. Compressive strength of 3000 PSI at age 28 days.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi) (420 MPa) yield strength.

1. Plain billet-steel bars.

2. Unfinished.

B. Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is involved and

truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Joint Reinforcement: type; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, mill galvanized to ASTM

A641/A641M, Class 3; side rods as detailed in the Drawing; width as required. Provide not less than 1

½-inch of mortar coverage on each exposure.

D. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes configured as required for specific situations in masonry joint. Hot-

dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Ties: Formed steel wire, ⅛-inch thick, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A

153/A 153M, Class B.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Preformed Control Joints: Polyvinyl chloride material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused

joints.

B. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.

2.6 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicted. H.D.G.

Page 36: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04 29 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.7 GROUT MIXING

A. Provide grout with a sump of 8- to 11-inches as measured according to ASTM C143.

2.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Testing will be conducted by an independent test agency, in accordance with provisions of Section

01400 - Quality Control.

B. Concrete Masonry: Test each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry unit in accordance with

ASTM C140/C140M for compliance with requirements of this specification.

C. Mortar Mixes: Test mortars prebatched by weight in accordance with ASTM C780 recommendations

for preconstruction testing.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.

B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust.

3.3 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform

thickness.

C. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Bond: One-half running bond

2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal ⅜-inches

3. Mortar Joints

Page 37: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04 29 00 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.4 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.

B. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.

C. Interlock intersections and external corners.

D. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges.

Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

3.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Joint Reinforcement: Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16-inches on center.

1. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.

B. Anchors: Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless

otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space anchors

at maximum of 12-inches (900 mm) horizontally and 16-inches (600 mm) vertically.

C. Wall Ties: Install wall ties at locations indicated, spaced at not more than 12-inches (610 mm) on

center horizontally and 16 inches (406 mm) on center vertically, unless otherwise indicated on

drawings.

3.6 MASONRY FLASHINGS

A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all

locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.

3.7 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints.

B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance

with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Size control joints as indicated on drawings; if not indicated, ⅜-inch (9.4 mm) wide and deep.

3.8 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, install built-in weld plates and other items to be built into the work and furnished

under other sections.

B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.

Page 38: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04 29 00 - 6

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: ⅛ inch in 10-feet.

B. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: ⅛ inch in 3 ft.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are

subject to damage by construction activities.

END OF SECTION

Page 39: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 04 81 00 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:

1. Concrete masonry units (light-weight).

2. Face brick.

3. Grout.

4. Masonry Joint Reinforcement.

5. Ties and anchors.

6. Embedded flashing.

7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 08 Section “Aluminum Windows”.

2. Division 07 Section "Fluid-Applied Weather Barrier" for liquid air barriers applied to cavity

face of backup wythes of cavity walls.

3. Division 07 Section "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to unit masonry

assemblies.

4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing.

5. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for wall vents.

C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, installed

under Division 05 Section "Structural Steel."

D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:

1. Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications."

2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 07

Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Aluminum door, window and storefront frames in unit masonry openings, furnished under

Division 08.

E. Allowances: Furnish the following under the allowances indicated, as specified in Division 01

Section "Allowances":

1. Source and field quality-control testing under Inspection and Testing Allowance.

Page 40: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days.

Determine compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314.

1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: f'm = 2500 psi.

2. For Brick Unit Masonry: f'm = 2500 psi.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Unit masonry Samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures

available for each different exposed masonry unit required.

2. Colored mortar Samples showing the full range of colors available.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following:

1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required, showing the full range of

exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction.

2. Colored mortar Samples for each color required, showing the full range of colors expected in

the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar ingredients to be

used on Project.

3. Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color.

4. Accessories embedded in the masonry.

D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the

following for compliance with requirements indicated:

1. Each type of masonry unit required.

a. Include size-variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within

specified tolerances.

b. Include test results, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area compressive

strength of masonry units.

2. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270.

3. Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476. Include

description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.

F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies

with requirements:

1. Each type of masonry unit required.

a. Include size-variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within

specified tolerances.

b. Include test data, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area compressive

Page 41: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

strength of masonry units.

G. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to

comply with cold-weather requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and

color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source

from a single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including

color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one

source or producer for each aggregate.

C. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to

perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made from the

Inspection and Testing Allowance, as authorized by Change Orders. Retesting of materials failing to

meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each clay masonry unit indicated, per ASTM C 67.

2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, per ASTM C 140.

3. Mortar Test: For mortar properties per ASTM C 270.

4. Grout Test: For compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. Delete subparagraph below if

mortar is specified to comply with proportion specification.

D. Sample Panels: Before installing unit masonry, build sample panels, using materials indicated for the

completed Work, to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic

effects. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry assembly in sizes approximately

48-inches long by 48 -inches high by full thickness.

1. Locate panels in the locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Clean exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated.

3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.

4. Maintain sample panels during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of

mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of

workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by

Architect in writing.

a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in sample panels, unless such deviations are

specifically approved by Architect in writing.

6. Demolish and remove sample panels when directed.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Project Meetings."

Page 42: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed

location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet,

do not install until they are dry.

1. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of

installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of

delivery.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use

cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained, and

contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and

emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated

platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and

oil.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when

construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24-inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,

secure cover a minimum of 24-inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover

in place.

B. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such

masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on

ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

Page 43: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or

frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by

freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F

and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after

completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions

produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind

breaks and use cooled materials as required.

1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than

8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48-inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units

within one minute of spreading mortar.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and

other special conditions.

2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 2500 psi.

2. Weight Classification: Light weight.

3. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units.

4. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions:

a. 4-inches nominal; 3 ⅝-inches actual.

b. 6-inches nominal; 5 ⅝-inches actual.

c. 8-inches nominal; 7 ⅝-inches actual.

d. 10-inches nominal; 9 ⅝-inches actual.

e. 12-inches nominal; 11 ⅝-inches actual.

5. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Where units are to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured-face units

made with gap-graded aggregates.

b. Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the range

represented by Architect's sample.

2.2 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required:

Page 44: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 6

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and

caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces.

B. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed

surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.

1. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special

conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in

sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

C. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade MW or SW, Type FBS, and as follows:

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 3000 psi.

2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 20 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67.

3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated “not

effloresced.”

4. Surface Coloring: Brick with surface coloring, other than flashed or sand-finished brick, shall

withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in

the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet.

5. Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions:

a. Modular Size: 3 ⅝-inches Wide x 2 ⅜-inches High x 7 ⅝-inches Long

6. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated.

7. Color and Texture: Match Architect’s samples.

8. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be in

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

9. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Brick as specified in Section 3.18.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather

construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,

Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.

D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.

E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

1. For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement formulation as required to produce a mortar color

which will compliment a red-brown brick. Color as selected by Architect.

a. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight for mineral

oxides nor 2 percent for carbon black.

b. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight for mineral oxides

Page 45: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 7

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

nor 1 percent for carbon black.

2. For colored-aggregate mortar, use natural color or white cement as necessary to produce

required mortar color.

F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than ¼-inch thick, use aggregate graded

with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.

1. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.

2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound

stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

H. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in

mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

I. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of

composition indicated.

J. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete

masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.

K. Water: Potable.

L. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

M. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:

a. Eaglebond; Blue Circle Cement.

b. Color Mortar Blend; Glen-Gery Corporation.

c. Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime; Holnam, Inc.

d. Centurion Colorbond PL; Lafarge Corporation.

e. Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime; Lehigh Portland Cement Co.

f. Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom Color; Riverton Corporation (The).

2. Mortar Cement:

a. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement.

b. Lafarge Mortar Cement; Lafarge Corporation.

3. Colored Mortar Cement:

a. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement.

4. Colored Masonry Cement:

a. Magnolia Masonry Cement; Blue Circle Cement.

b. Brixment-in-Color; Essroc Materials, Inc.

c. Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement; Holnam, Inc.

d. Centurion Colorbond; Lafarge Corporation.

e. Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement; Lehigh Portland Cement Co.

f. Coosa Masonry Cement; National Cement Company, Inc.

g. Flamingo Color Masonry Cement; Riverton Corporation (The).

h. Richcolor Masonry Cement; Southdown, Inc.

Page 46: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 8

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

5. Mortar Pigments:

a. True Tone Mortar Colors; Davis Colors.

b. Centurion Pigments; Lafarge Corporation.

c. SGS Mortar Colors; Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.

6. Cold-Weather Admixture:

a. Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co.

b. Morseled; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division.

c. Trimix-NCA; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.

7. Water-Repellent Admixture:

a. Mortar Tite; Addiment Inc.

b. Dry-Block Mortar Admixture; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division.

c. Rheopel; Master Builders.

2.4 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, including Supplement 1; or

ASTM A 617/A 617M, Grade 60.

2.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: ASTM A 951 and as follows:

1. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for both interior and exterior walls.

2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter.

3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter.

4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units where

indicated.

B. For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods and cross

rods spaced not more than 16-inches o.c.

C. For multiwythe masonry, provide types as follows:

1. Ladder type with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16-inches o.c. and 1 side rod

for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4-inches in width, plus 1 side rod for

each wythe of masonry 4-inches or less in width.

2. Tab type with single pair of side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of backup

wythe and rectangular box-type cross ties spaced not more than 16-inches o.c. Size ties to

extend at least halfway through outer wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

3. Adjustable (2-piece) type with single pair of side rods and cross ties spaced not more than 16-

inches o.c. and with separate adjustable veneer ties engaging the cross ties. Cross ties are

either U-shaped with eyes or rectangular. Space side rods for embedment within each face

shell of backup wythe and size adjustable ties to extend at least halfway through outer wythe

but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

a. Use where indicated and where horizontal joints of facing wythe do not align with

those of backup wythe.

b. Use where facing wythe is of different material than backup wythe.

Page 47: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 9

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that comply

with this Article, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mill Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 641, Class 1 coating.

C. Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating.

D. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304 or 316.

E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, commercial-quality, steel sheet zinc coated by

hot-dip process on continuous lines before fabrication.

F. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 366/A 366M cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet

hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153.

G. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316.

H. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.7 BENT WIRE TIES

A. General: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4-inches wide. Z-shaped ties with

ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2-inches long may be used for masonry

constructed from solid units or hollow units laid with cells horizontal.

1. Where coursing between wythes does not align, use adjustable ties composed of 2 parts; 1

with pintles, the other with eyes; with maximum misalignment of 1-1/4-inches.

2. Where wythes are of different materials, use adjustable ties composed of 2 parts; 1 with

pintles, the other with eyes; with maximum misalignment of 1-1/4-inches.

B. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch-diameter, galvanized steel wire.

2.8 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STEEL FRAME

A. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension

and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire anchor section for

welding to steel.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made

from 0.1875-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

2.9 RIGID ANCHORS

A. General: Fabricate from steel bars as follows:

Page 48: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 10

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1. 1 ½-inches wide by ¼-inch thick by 24-inches long, with ends turned up 2-inches or with

cross pins.

2. As indicated.

3. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153 for interior wall applications.

Stainless steel at both wythes of all exterior masonry walls.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron inserts of type and size indicated.

B. Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from

0.0336-inch, galvanized steel sheet.

C. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,

where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter

and length indicated and in the following configurations:

1. Headed bolts.

2. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated.

2.11 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Contractor's Option for Concealed Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use metal

flashing specified. For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use the following, unless otherwise

indicated:

1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product consisting

of a pliable and highly adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density,

cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of 0.030-inch.

2. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product

consisting of a polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy 0.025-inch-thick with a

0.015-inch-thick layer of rubberized-asphalt adhesive.

a. Provide flashing as a complete system with preformed corners, end dams, other

special shapes, and seaming materials; all produced by flashing sheet manufacturer.

B. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal

Flashing and Trim."

C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or

products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to

substrates.

D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing:

Page 49: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 11

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

a. Dur-O-Barrier; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.

b. Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division.

c. Textroflash; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

d. Poly-Barrier Self-Adhering Wall Flashing; Polytite Manufacturing Corp.

e. Polyguard 300; Polyguard Products, Inc.

f. Everlastic MF-40; Williams Products, Inc.

2. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing:

a. Hyload Flashing Membrane; Hyload Cloaked Flashing System.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block

and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

1. Styrene-Butadiene-Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805.

2. PVC: ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I

(No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch OD by 4-inches long.

E. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, ⅜ by 1 ½-inches by 3 ½-inches

F. Wicking Material: Cotton or polyester rope, ¼ to ⅜-inch in diameter, in length required to produce

2-inch exposure on exterior and 18-inches in cavity between wythes.

G. Cavity Drainage Material: 2-inch-thick, free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands and

shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings.

H. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit

cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.187-inch

steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

1. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.

I. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cavity drainage materials that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

J. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent:

a. Cell Vent; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.

2. Cavity Drainage Material:

a. Mortar Break; Advanced Building Products, Inc.

b. CavClear Masonry Mat; CavClear.

Page 50: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 12

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

c. Mortar Net; Mortar Net USA, Ltd.

d. Mortar Stop; Polytite Manufacturing Corp.

3. Reinforcing Bar Positioners:

a. D/A 811; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.

b. D/A 816; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.

c. No. 376 Rebar Positioner; Heckman Building Products, Inc.

d. #RB Rebar Positioner; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

e. #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

f. Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America.

g. O-Ring Rebar Positioner; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America.

2.13 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and

1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water.

B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without

discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by

cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be used to

clean unit masonry surfaces include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cleaners for Red and Light-Colored Brick Not Subject to Metallic Staining with

Mortar Not Subject to Bleaching:

1) 202 New Masonry Detergent; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

2) Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc.

b. Cleaners for Red and Dark-Colored Brick Not Subject to Metallic Staining:

1) 200 Lime Solv; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

2) Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent; ProSoCo., Inc.

c. Cleaners for Brick Subject to Metallic Staining:

1) 202V Vana-Stop; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

2) Sure Klean Vana Trol; ProSoCo, Inc.

2.14 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,

water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless of weather

conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix.

Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients

before delivering to Project site.

Page 51: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 13

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification.

1. Extended-Life Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may be used

instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option.

2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime.

3. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type S.

4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications

where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required.

Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight:

1. For mineral-oxide pigments and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 10 percent.

2. For carbon-black pigment and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 2 percent.

3. For mineral-oxide pigments and masonry cement mortar, not more than 5 percent.

4. For carbon-black pigment and masonry cement mortar, not more than 1 percent.

E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates combined

with selected cementitious materials.

1. Mix to match Architect's sample.

F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will

comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and

pour height.

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11-inches as measured according to ASTM C 143.

2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing

indicated below:

1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner from the Inspection and Testing

Allowance, as authorized by Change Orders].

2. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's

expense.

B. Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested according to

ASTM C 67.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

Page 52: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 14

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

performance.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.

3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping

connections.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness

shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths

indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other Sections of the

Specifications.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing

equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening.

D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as

required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use

full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless

wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges

concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per

minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at the

time of laying.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following:

B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and

control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum.

C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10

feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum.

Page 53: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 15

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary

from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum.

E. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,

with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent

courses by more than 1/8 inch.

F. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.

Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses

and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using

less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use

units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above

and below at all interior walls and at typical locations.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than

2-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than

nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-half running

bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set

masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar

before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of

the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath

in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24-inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,

posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of roof structure above,

unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

2. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or

metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final

position.

Page 54: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 16

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3. At fire-rated partitions, install firestopping in joint between top of partition and underside of

structure above to comply with Building Code Requirements.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows:

1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.

2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and

pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.

3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed,

including areas under cells.

B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with

sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush

head joints.

1. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As

work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against the cavity face of the

brick.

C. Set stone trim units in full bed of mortar with vertical joints slushed full. Fill dowel, anchor, and

similar holes solid. Wet stone-joint surface thoroughly before setting; for soiled stone surfaces, clean

bedding and exposed surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear

water.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint

thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than

paint), unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY

A. Use individual metal ties installed in horizontal joints to bond wythes together. Provide ties as

shown, but not less than one metal tie for 1.33 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 12-inches o.c.

horizontally and 16-inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties

within 12-inches of openings and space not more than 36-inches apart around perimeter of openings.

At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24-inches o.c. vertically.

B. Use masonry joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints to bond wythes together.

C. Use either bonding system specified above.

D. Use bonding system indicated on Drawings.

E. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless

otherwise indicated.

Page 55: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 17

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated "L"

units as well as masonry bonding.

F. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture,

bond walls together as follows:

1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 16-inches o.c.

2. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T" units.

3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24-inches o.c. If used with hollow masonry units,

embed ends in mortar-filled cores.

3.7 CAVITIES

A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction.

1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work

progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity.

2. Provide temporary opening by omitting 1 brick every 48-inches at bottom of cavity and in

first course above flashing. After wall has been built to top of cavity and mortar has set, clean

out cavity and then close temporary opening.

B. See Division 07 Section 07 27 26 "Fluid-Applied Air Barrier" for coating of masonry wall backup.

C. Cavity-Wall Insulation shall be installed as in Section 07 21 00 “Building Insulation”.

1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and

masonry.

3.8 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of

longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch

elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6-inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16-inches o.c.

2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8-inches above and below wall openings and extending

12-inches beyond openings.

B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut

and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column

fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

Page 56: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 18

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply

with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1-inch in width between masonry and structural member,

unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and

attached to structure.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24-inches o.c. vertically and 36-inches o.c.

horizontally.

3.10 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to

comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to wall framing or to concrete and masonry

backup with two metal fasteners of type indicated.

2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2-inches of air space between

back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.

3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.

4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16-inches o.c. vertically and 12-inches o.c.

horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 1.33 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional

anchors within 12-inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8-inches, around the

perimeter.

3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related items

as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions

are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of

control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces.

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.

3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep

head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint.

4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is

complete.

C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows:

1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4-inches in direction of

water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry.

Page 57: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 19

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3. Build in joint fillers where indicated.

4. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than ⅜-inch for installation of sealant and

backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Keep joint free and clear of

mortar.

D. Build in horizontal, pressure-relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by either leaving an air

space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod

specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer

and attached to structure behind masonry veneer.

3.12 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated. Hot dip galvanized.

B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12-inches for brick-size units

and 24-inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

1. Provide precast lintels made from concrete with reinforcing bars indicated or required to

support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by the same method used for concrete masonry

units.

2. Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam

units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast

lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

3. Provide either of above at Contractor's option or provide precast or formed-in-place concrete

lintels complying with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Provide minimum bearing of 8-inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

3.13 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other

obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing.

Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with

mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as

recommended by flashing manufacturer.

C. Install flashing as follows:

1. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of

outer wythe of masonry, through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8-inches, and through

inner wythe to within ½-inch of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where

interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through

inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through veneer, up

Page 58: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 20

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

face of sheathing at least 8 inches, and behind air-infiltration barrier or building paper.

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each end.

At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches

to form a pan.

4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2

inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant

complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for application

indicated.

5. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn flashing

down to form a drip.

6. Install metal drip edges beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2 inch back

from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal drip edge.

7. Install metal flashing termination beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2

inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

8. Cut flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately

above embedded flashing and as follows:

1. Use round plastic tubing with wicking material to form weep holes.

2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in brick sills. Turn wicking down at

lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.

3. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c.

4. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing or wicking material 16 inches o.c.

5. In cavities, place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course, but not less than 2

inches, immediately above top of flashing embedded in the wall, as masonry construction

progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage.

6. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities.

E. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.

F. Install vents in vertical head joints at the top of each continuous cavity at spacing indicated. Use

rectangular plastic tubing to form vents.

1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install

through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

G. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built

into masonry.

3.14 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry

elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it sufficiently

tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain

position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened

Page 59: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 21

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them

during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient

strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing

indicated below.

1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner from the Inspection and Testing

Allowance, as authorized by Change Orders.

2. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's

expense.

B. Mortar properties will be tested per ASTM C 780.

C. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.

D. Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested according to

ASTM C 67.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested

according to ASTM C 140.

3.16 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or

that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar,

pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely

fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a

neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins

and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or

chisels.

Page 60: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 22

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with

cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them

with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing

the surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes

No. 20, using job-mixed detergent solution.

6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type

of stain on exposed surfaces.

8. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in the Indiana Limestone Institute of

America's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."

3.17 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste and other masonry waste, and legally

dispose of off Owner's property.

3.18 SCHEDULE OF TYPES AND COLORS OF MASONRY UNITS AND MORTAR

A. Type 1: CMU – 4”, 6”, 8”, 10” and 12” x 16” x 8” light weight Concrete Masonry Units.

1. Color: Gray block and mortar.

2. Special Shapes: Provide bullnose units for exposed outside corners.

B. Face Brick – No Substitutions

1. Type 1:

a. Manufacturer: Kinney Brick

b. Color: Red Velour modular or Varsity Velour modular

2. Type 2:

a. Manufacturer: Meridian Brick

b. Color: Wheat Velour modular

3. Type 3:

a. Manufacturer: Meridian Brick

b. Color: V-500 Velour modular

C. Mortar: All mortar shall be gray colored mortar.

D. Field color samples must be approved by Architect prior to fabrication of brick.

END OF SECTION

Page 61: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections apply to work of this Section.

1.2 DESCRPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of structural steel work is shown on drawings including schedules, notes and details which

show size and location of members, typical connections, and type of steel required. Furnish all labor,

materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with or related to the furnishing,

fabrication, delivery, and erection of all structural steel defined below. Include all supplementary

parts, members and connections necessary to complete the structural steel work, regardless of whether

all such items are specifically shown or specified on the drawings.

B. Structural steel shall be defined as that work prescribed in Section 2.1 of the AISC Code of Standard

Practice and the following items: angle frames for openings in roofs, miscellaneous metal deck

support and edge angles, shop welded metal studs, all connection material, temporary construction

bracing, and all other structural steel shown or specified on the drawings to be part of the work. Labor

shall include shop painting as specified, field touch-up painting, and grouting of base plates and

bearing plates.

C. Miscellaneous metal fabrications, architecturally exposed structural steel, metal ladders, steel joists and

metal deck are specified elsewhere in these Contract Documents.

D. Related Sections:

1. Section 05 21 00 – Steel Joist Framing

2. Section 05 31 00 – Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in deck.

3. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications

4. Section 05 52 10 – Pipe and Tube Railings

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including complete details and schedules for fabrication and

assembly of structural steel members, details, schedules, procedures, and diagrams showing sequence

of erection. Shop drawings not complying with the requirements in this Section will not be reviewed.

1. Structural Steel shop drawings shall include the following:

a. Details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

b. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length and type of each

weld.

c. Holes, flange cuts, slots and openings shall be made as required by the structural

drawings, all of which shall be properly located by means of templates.

Page 62: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. Fabrication:

1. Fabricator alone shall be responsible for all errors of detailing, fabrication, and for the correct

fitting of the structural members.

2. All fabricated materials and connections shall fit within architectural constraints.

3. Structural steel members for which shop drawings have not been reviewed and approved shall

not be fabricated.

C. The omission from the shop drawings of any materials required by the Contract Documents shall not

relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and installing such materials, even though the

shop drawings may have been reviewed and approved.

D. Test Reports: Submit copies of reports of test conducted on all field-welded connections that are

inspected. Include data on type(s) of tests conducted and test results.

E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the

previous 12 months.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC (MAN) "Steel Construction Manual."

B. Structural steel members designated as architecturally-exposed structural steel (AESS) to also comply

with Section 05 12 13.

C. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of

documented experience.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International

Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel in accordance with IAS

AC172.

E. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of

documented experience.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: All hot-rolled steel plates, shapes, sheet piling, and bars shall be new steel conforming

to ASTM Specification A6 “Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates,

Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use”. Structural steel shall comply with the provisions of

the following ASTM Specifications as appropriate for the grades and types, and at the location as

specified in the drawings:

1. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M.

2. Steel Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M.

3. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.

Page 63: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A242/A242M high-strength, corrosion-resistant structural steel.

C. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A529/A529M high-strength, carbon-manganese structural steel,

Grade 50.

D. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50 (345) high-strength, columbium-vanadium

steel.

E. Steel Plate: ASTM A514/A514M.

F. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation SS, Grade 30 hot-rolled, or ASTM

A1008/A1008M, Designation SS, Grade 30 cold-rolled.

G. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B.

H. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A108 Grade 1015 bars.

I. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A and galvanized in compliance with

ASTM A153/A153M, Class C.

J. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, with matching

compatible ASTM A563 or ASTM A563M nuts and ASTM F436/F436M washers.

K. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, plain, with matching ASTM A563 or ASTM

A563M nuts and ASTM F436/F436M Type 1 washers.

L. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A307, Grade C, plain.

M. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.

N. Primer Paint

1. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of

authorities having jurisdiction. Gray color.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.

2.3 FINISH

A. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in

contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.

Page 64: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of shop-bolted connections in accordance with

RCSC (HSBOLT) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts", testing at least 5

percent of bolts at each connection.

B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all shop-welded connections and test at least 5 percent of welds

using one of the following:

1. Non-Destructive Testing

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly

proceed.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC 303.

B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe

condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent

bracing.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensional Tolerances: Dimensional tolerances of fabricated structural steel shall conform to Section

6.4 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400 -

Quality Control.

END OF SECTION

Page 65: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

STEEL JOIST FRAMING Section 05 21 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 05 21 00 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract include General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Open web steel joists and shear stud connectors, with bridging, attached seats and anchors.

B. Loose bearing members, such as plates or angles, and anchor bolts for site placement.

C. Supplementary framing for roof openings greater than 18 inches (450 mm).

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Grouting base plates and bearing plates. Superstructure

framing.

B. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Superstructure framing.

C. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Bearing plates and angles.

D. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Support framing for openings less than 18 inches (450 mm) in

decking.

E. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Non-framing steel fabrications attached to joists.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI

Tensile Strength; 2014 (Editorial 2017).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate standard designations, joist coding, configurations, sizes, spacings, cambers,

locations of joists, joist leg extensions, bridging, connections, and attachments.

Page 66: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

STEEL JOIST FRAMING Section 05 21 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Design connections not detailed on drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural

Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

B. Perform Work, including that for headers and other supplementary framing, in accordance with SJI

100 Standard Specifications Load Tables and SJI Technical Digest No. 9.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum five (5) years documented experience.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International

Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel in accordance with IAS

AC172.

E. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

five (5) years documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to SJI requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Open Web Joists: DLH-Series and K-Series

1. Provide bottom chord extensions as indicated.

2. Minimum End Bearing on Steel Supports: Comply with referenced SJI standard.

3. Minimum End Bearing on Concrete or Masonry Supports: Comply with referenced SJI

standard.

4. Finish: Shop primed, gray paint

B. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M, Class C.

C. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, with matching

compatible ASTM A563 or ASTM A563M nuts and ASTM F436/F436M washers.

D. Tension Control Bolts: Twist-off type; ASTM F3125/F3125M.

E. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A108 Grade 1015 bars.

F. Structural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A36/A36M.

G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.

Page 67: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

STEEL JOIST FRAMING Section 05 21 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

H. Primer Paint:

1. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

2. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying

with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Drill holes in chords for attachment of wood nailers where indicated.

B. Frame special sized openings in joist web framing as detailed.

2.3 FINISH

A. Prepare surfaces to be finished in accordance with SSPC-SP 2.

B. Paint: Gray

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of shop-bolted connections in accordance with

RCSC (HSBOLT) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts", testing at least 15

percent of bolts at each connection.

B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all shop-welded connections and test at least 10 percent of

welds using one of the following:

1. Non-Destructive Testing

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Erect joists with correct bearing on supports.

B. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in

true alignment.

C. Coordinate the placement of anchors for securing loose bearing members furnished as part of the work

of this section.

Page 68: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

STEEL JOIST FRAMING Section 05 21 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

D. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seats to steel bearing surfaces.

E. Position and field weld joist chord extensions and wall attachments as detailed.

F. Install supplementary framing for roof openings greater than 18 inches (450 mm).

G. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced, bridged, and secured or until completion of

erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing.

H. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer.

I. After erection, prime welds, damaged shop primer, damaged galvanizing, and surfaces not shop

primed, except surfaces specified not to be primed.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400 -

Quality Control.

B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections in accordance with

RCSC (HSBOLT) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts", testing at least 15

percent of bolts at each connection.

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections and test at least 10 percent of

welds using one of the following:

END OF SECTION

Page 69: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

STEEL DECKING Section 05 31 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 05 31 00 – STEEL DECKING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete topping over metal deck.

C. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors for bearing plates embedded in unit masonry

assemblies.

D. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches (450

mm) and shear stud connectors.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015, with Errata (2016).

B. SDI (DM) - Publication No.30, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks;

2007.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement, pertinent

details, and accessories.

B. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the

previous 12 months.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional Structural

Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.

Page 70: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

STEEL DECKING Section 05 31 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.

B. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel Deck: Vulcraft or approved equal.

2.2 STEEL DECK

A. All Deck Types: Select and design metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual.

1. Calculate to structural working stress design and structural properties specified.

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M steel, galvanized per ASTM A123/A123M.

B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self-tapping.

D. Powder Actuated Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; with knurled shank and forged ballistic point. Comply

with applicable requirements of ICC-ES AC70.

1. Products:

E. Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; hex washer head, self-drilling, self-tapping.

F. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having

jurisdiction.

G. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Pain 20, complying with VOC limitations of

authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 ½-inch thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck.

2.4 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES

A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops, and cover plates, 22-gauge

sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck.

Page 71: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

STEEL DECKING Section 05 31 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. Roof Sump Pans: Formed sheet steel, 22-gauge, minimum thickness, flat bottom, sloped sides,

recessed below roof deck surface, bearing flange, sealed watertight.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align and

level.

B. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 3-inch bearing.

C. On steel supports provide minimum 2-inch bearing.

D. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports per drawings.

1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers.

E. At mechanically fastened male/female side laps fasten at 24 inches (600 mm) on center maximum. See

Drawings.

F. Drive mechanical sidelap connectors completely through adjacent lapped sheets; positively engage

adjacent sheets with minimum three-thread penetration.

G. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M. See Drawings.

H. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and angle

flashings to close openings.

I. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam cell

closures.

J. Place metal cant strips in position and fusion weld.

K. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck flute.

L. Position floor drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck flute.

M. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and

damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer, zinc-rich paint.

END OF SECTION

Page 72: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND
Page 73: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Exterior nonload-bearing steel-stud curtainwall.

2. Exterior mold-resistant sheathing and air-infiltration barriers.

3. Stud wind uplift bracing for plaster soffits.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 01 Section “Windstorm Construction Requirements” for wind load requirements and

certifications.

2. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connection.

3. Division 09 Section "Portland Cement Plaster".

4. Division 07 Section “Fluid Applied Weather Barrier”.

5. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect cold-formed metal framing to withstand design

loads within limits and under conditions required. Meet Texas Windstorm Requirements in Section

01450

1. Design Loads: 35 psf wind load plus other applicable code required live and dead loads.

2. Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the

following:

a. Exterior Nonload-Bearing Studwall:

3. Lateral deflection of 1/360 of the wall height at plaster or stucco walls.

4. Lateral deflection of 1/600 of the wall height at masonry walls.

5. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or

overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or

other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change (range) of

120 deg F (67 deg C).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections.

Page 74: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. Product data for each type of cold-formed metal framing, accessory, and product specified.

C. Shop drawings showing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing,

fabrication, fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels,

opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection

details, and attachments to other units of Work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-

service performance.

B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel"

and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage,

and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed

metal framing that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the

following:

1. Dale/Incor Industries of Florida. - CEE Stud.

2. Unimast, Inc. - U.S. Gypsum - SJ Stud.

3. Dietrien Industries, Inc.

4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446 (ASTM A 446M), zinc coated according to ASTM A 525

(ASTM A 525M), and as follows:

Page 75: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1. "C" stud shaped; 16 gauge; 1 5/8 inch wide face and 3 5/8, 6 and 8 inch deep punched stud at

locations indicated on the Drawings.

2. Coating Designation: G 60 (Z 275).

3. Grade: Grade D, 50,000 psi (345 MPa) minimum yield strength, 12 percent elongation.

2.3 WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard galvanized C-shaped steel studs of web depths indicated, with lipped

flanges, and complying with the following:

1. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm).

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).

3. Web: Punched.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard galvanized U-shaped steel track, unpunched, of web depths

indicated, with straight flanges, and complying with the following:

1. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Matching steel studs.

2. Flange Width: Manufacturers standard deep flange where indicated, standard flange

elsewhere.

2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a

minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa).

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated,

as follows:

1. Supplementary framing.

2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.

3. Web stiffeners.

4. Gusset plates.

5. Deflection track and vertical slide clips.

6. Stud kickers and girts.

7. End closures.

8. Reinforcement plates.

2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), zinc coated by the hot-dip process according to

ASTM A 123.

B. Cast-in-Place Anchor Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6);

carbon-steel hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened-steel washers. Zinc

coated by the hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153.

Page 76: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without

failure, a load equal to 5 times the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted

by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Powder-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from

corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times the

design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing

agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of

94 percent zinc dust by weight.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at

ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and

hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing

selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing

agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and a 30-minute working time.

D. Thermal Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced mineral-fiber blankets produced by combining

glass or slag fibers with thermosetting resins.

2.7 GYPSUM SHEATHING

A. Gypsum Sheathing Board with Water-Resistant Core: Gypsum sheathing board consisting of

noncombustible gypsum core incorporating a water-resistant material surfaced on face, back, and long

edges with water-repellent paper bonded to the core. Comply with ASTM C 79 and requirements

indicated below:

1. Type: Regular.

2. Edge and End Configuration: Square.

3. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide only the following:

1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Board, Regular Type:

a. Dens-Glass Gold Exterior Sheathing; Georgia-Pacific Corp.

b. Sheetrock Brand Glass Mat Mold-Tough Panels; U.S. Gypsum Corporation

Page 77: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

c. No substitutions will be allowed.

C. Sheathing Fasteners: ASTM C 954, steel drill screws, Type S-12 fluted tip, a minimum of 1-1/4 inches

(32 mm) long, with organic-polymer coating or other corrosion-protective coating.

2.8 TAPES AND SEALANT

A. Sheathing Tape: Tape specifically designed and manufactured to seal joints in gypsum sheathing

against water and air infiltration, formulated with an adhesive that permanently bonds to gypsum

sheathing substrates, and as indicated below:

1. Linerless, polypropylene sheathing tape, 0.0027 inch (0.07 mm) thick, 2-1/2 inches (63 mm)

wide, composed of oriented polypropylene backing coated with permanent acrylic adhesive

formulated to adhere to gypsum sheathing surfaces.

2. Polyethylene tape, 0.025 inch (0.63 mm) thick, 3 inches (76 mm) wide, composed of

polyethylene backing coated with synthetic-rubber-based adhesive.

3. Self-adhering, glass-fiber tape, 2 inches (51 mm) wide, 10-by-10 or 10-by-20 threads per inch

(25.4 mm), of type recommended by tape manufacturer to use with siliconized emulsion

sealant in sealing joints and fasteners for gypsum sheathing, and with a history of successful

in-service use.

4. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, sheathing tapes that may be

incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Product complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sealant tape and

gypsum sheathing, recommended by manufacturers of both sheathing and tape for use with glass-fiber

sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Elmer's Siliconized Acrylic Latex

Caulk; Borden, Inc.

2.9 AIR-INFILTRATION BARRIER

A. Tape and waterproof all joints in sheathing.

B. Provide one of the following products at all sheathing joints:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I, No. 15 asphalt felt, unperforated.

2. Laminated polyethylene sheet, 0.003 inch (0.08 mm) thick, consisting of 2 plies of

microperforated, cross-laminated polyethylene sheets, with a water-vapor transmission rate

equaling 87.2 perms (5000 SI perms).

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections

securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies in jig templates.

Page 78: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 6

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with

fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality

of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-framed metal framing

manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3

exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening,

according to manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses.

Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from

plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)

from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of

sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square

tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements,

including installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cold-formed metal

framing. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field

assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections

securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of this Section.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with

fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality

of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-framed metal framing

manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3

exposed screw threads.

Page 79: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 7

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or

tension members.

D. Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until framing is permanently stabilized.

E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently

frame both sides of joints.

F. Fasten reinforcement plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched

openings.

G. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing to a maximum allowable tolerance variation

from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan

location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or

other finishing materials.

3.3 NONLOAD-BEARING CURTAINWALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to

supporting structure as indicated.

B. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and

bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm) or closer to meet manufacturer's wind load requirements.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped

surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of vertical loads

while providing lateral support.

1. Install deflection track and anchor to building structure.

2. Connect studs with vertical slide clips to continuous angles or supplementary framing

anchored to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in curtainwall studs, spaced in rows not more than 48 inches (1219 mm)

apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Install additional row of horizontal bridging in curtainwall stud beneath deflection track when

curtainwall studs are not fastened to an additional top track.

2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, clip angle fastened to webs of punched studs.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles,

continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtainwall-

framing system.

Page 80: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 8

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.4 GYPSUM SHEATHING

A. General: Install gypsum sheathing board according to manufacturer's instructions and GA-253

"Application of Gypsum Sheathing."

B. Install square end and edged sheathing vertically with long edges parallel to, and centered over, studs.

Install solid blocking where end joints do not bear against framing sills or track. Fasten gypsum

sheathing board to perimeter framing and to each stud with self-drilling, bugle-head screws, located a

minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from ends and edges of board units, as follows:

1. Space fasteners to comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Space fasteners not more than 4 inches (102 mm) apart around perimeter at edge and end

supports and 8 inches (203 mm) apart at intermediate supports.

3.5 WIND UPLIFT BRACING

A. Install one wind uplift 3 5/8" stud brace for every (64) sixty-four square feet of new plaster soffit.

3.6 TAPE AND SEALANT APPLICATION

A. Sheathing Tape: Apply sheathing tape to joints in sheathing; overlap tape by not less than the tape

width at joint intersections.

1. For polyethylene tape, apply primer, specified by tape manufacturer, to sheathing surfaces. In

addition, apply polyethylene tape, 2 inches (50 mm) square, to completely cover each exposed

fastener.

2. For glass-fiber tape, apply approximately a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) bead of siliconized emulsion

sealant to tapes along joints and embed sealant into tapes along their entire surface with a

trowel. In addition, apply sealant with a trowel to each exposed fastener so that fasteners are

completely covered.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will perform

field quality-control testing.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified

requirements.

Page 81: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 9

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed

cold-formed metal framing with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the

manufacturer's instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on fabricated and

installed prime-painted, cold-formed metal framing.

1. Touchup painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces.

C. Protect gypsum sheathing that will be exposed to weather. Replace any materials which exhibit

evidence of water saturation or mold and mildew.

1. Protect cutouts, corners, and joints in the sheathing by filling with a flexible sealant or by

applying tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer at the time sheathing is applied.

D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer

to ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial

Completion.

END OF SECTION

Page 82: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND
Page 83: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Loose bearing, levelling plates and lintels.

2. Miscellaneous metal trim.

3. Overhead Door Frames and Imbeds

4. Steel plates at various locations

5. Stone table supports

6. Steel plates and tubes at exterior canopy supports

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry Systems”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans,

elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and

accessory items.

1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as

sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code – Steel”

2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

Page 84: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction,

verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop

Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the

Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field

measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to

established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and

items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to

Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide

materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do no use materials with exposed pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.3 PAINT

A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 “Painting”.

B. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd

primer complying with performance requirements FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to

normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to

provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

C. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with topcoat.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carboline 621; Carboline Company

Page 85: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

b. Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670; PPG Industries, Inc.

c. Tnemec-Zinc 90-97; Tnemec Company, Inc.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,

complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing

no asbestos fibers or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with

coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select

fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts ASTM A 563;

and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B18.6.1.

G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel ASME B18.22.1.

H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1

I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability

to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times and load imposed when installed in unit

masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by

testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class

Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts

complying with ASTM F 594.

J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed.

2.5 GROUT

A. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous

grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer

for interior and exterior applications.

Page 86: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing

and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use

connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and

coordinated installation.

B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.

C. East exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent

metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing

work.

D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base materials.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surfaces.

E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space

anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and

similar items.

G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep

holes where water may accumulate.

H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the maximum change (range) in ambient and surface

temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of

connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures

of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120°F, ambient; 180°F, material surfaces.

I. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp

edges.

J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.

K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smoother, using concealed fasteners

where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Philips flat-head

(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

Page 87: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.7 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete

construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates after fabrication.

2.8 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose H.D.G. structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for

openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

C. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one-twelfth of clear

span, but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located at exterior walls.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural steel framework as

necessary to complete the Work.

B. General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the Work.

C. Fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless

otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive

adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive

hardware, hangers, and similar items.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

2. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with

integrally welded steel strap anchors 1 ¼ inches wide by ¼ inch thick by 8 inches long at

24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

3. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is places.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles

shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use

concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with

other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction,

spaced not more than 6 inches from end, 6 inches from corners, and 24 inches o.c., unless

otherwise indicated.

Page 88: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-6

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed

below:

1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.

2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum

requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental

exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, “Commercial Blast Cleaning”

2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning”

C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized

finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, “Paint Application Specification No.1” for shop

painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for

securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and

masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal

fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in locations, alignment, and elevation; with edges

and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,

masonry, or similar construction.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not

to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not

weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication

and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

Page 89: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-7

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout,

concrete, masonry, wood or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.2 SETTING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve

bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have

been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if

protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use non-shrink grout, either metallic or non-metallic, in concealed locations where not

exposed to moisture; use non-shrink, non-metallic grout in exposed locations, unless

otherwise indicated.

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.3 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,

including manufacturers’ written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if

any.

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders

with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of

pipe columns.

1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated at girders supported on concrete or

masonry, install as specified above for setting and grouting bearing and leveling plates.

D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column

baseplates as specified above for setting and grouting bearing and leveling plates.

1. Do not grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders until girders are installed and

leveled.

Page 90: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-8

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded

areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to

comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

Page 91: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 05 52 10 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Welded galvanized steel pipe and railing systems for video filming platform.

2. Railing gate for access to platform.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing-related terms apply to this Section.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: In engineering handrail and railing systems to withstand structural loads indicated, determine

allowable design working stresses of materials based on the following:

1. Cold-Formed Structural Steel: AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel

Structural Members."

B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails

and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance based on

the following:

1. Testing performed according to ASTM E 894 and E 935.

2. Structural computations.

C. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails

and railing systems to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design

working stress of the materials for handrails, railing systems, anchors, and connections. Apply each

load to produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components comprising handrails and

railing systems.

1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as

indicated:

a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction.

b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot (730 N/m) applied horizontally and

Page 92: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

concurrently with uniform load of 100 lbf per linear foot (1460 N/m) applied

vertically downward.

c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as

indicated:

a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction.

b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot (730 N/m) applied in any direction.

c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.

3. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of

200 lbf (890 N) applied to 1 sq. ft. (0.09 sq. m) at any point in the system including panels,

intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing the infill area. Above load need not

be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails of railing systems in determining stress

on guard.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change

(range) in ambient temperature in engineering, fabricating, and installing handrails and railing systems

to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components and connections, and other

detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to

both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C)

ambient 180 deg F (100 deg C) material surfaces.

E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and

other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01

Specification Sections.

B. Product data for mechanically connected handrails and railing systems, each kind of fitting, grout,

anchoring cement, and paint products.

C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railing systems including plans,

elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. For installed

handrails and railing systems indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural

analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for their

preparation.

D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors

available for those units with factory-applied color finishes.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and material from a

single manufacturer.

Page 93: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where

Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated for handrails

and railing systems similar to this Project in material, design, and extent, and that have a record of

successful in-service performance.

1.7 STORAGE

A. Store handrails and railing systems inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and

masonry and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Where handrails and railing systems are indicated to fit to other construction,

check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show

recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction

progress to avoid delaying the Work. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the

Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating handrails and railing systems without field

measurements. Coordinate other construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to

guaranteed dimensions.

1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails as follows:

1. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily by any means

not satisfying structural performance requirements.

2. Mount handrails on plaster or gypsum board assemblies only where reinforced to receive

anchors and where the location of concealed reinforcements has been clearly marked for

benefit of Installer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Stainless Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:

1. Supplier: S.C. Welding – (361) 446-1992

2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Blum: Julius Blum & Co.

2.2 METALS

A. General: Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit.

Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other

Page 94: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.

B. Stainless Steel Welded Pipe Handrail:

1. Handrail shall be constructed of 1-1/2-inch nominal N.S.P. 316 stainless steel pipe. All

connector fittings shall be welded. Finish to be polished and clear anodized after fabrication.

C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same material and finish as supported

rails, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS

A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as

recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and

compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the type, grade, and class

required to produce connections that are suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction

indicated and capable of withstanding design loadings.

1. For steel railings and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn

25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened

metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials

joined.

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and their attachment to

other work, except where otherwise indicated.

2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and their attachment to

other work, except where exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening

method for handrail and railing system indicated.

3. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cast-in-Place and Post-installed Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-

resistant materials, capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed

when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as

determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified, independent testing agency.

1. Cast-in-place anchors.

2. Expansion anchors.

2.4 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous

grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for

interior and exterior applications.

Page 95: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the

Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grouts:

a. B-6 Construction Grout; W.R. Bonsal Co.

b. Diamond-Crete Grout; Concrete Service Materials Co.

c. Supreme; Cormix Construction Chemicals.

d. Sure-grip High Performance Grout; Dayton Superior Corp.

e. Euco N-S Grout; Euclid Chemical Co.

f. Five Star Grout; Five Star Products.

g. Vibropruf #11; Lambert Corp.

h. Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

i. Masterflow 928 and 713; Master Builders Technologies, Inc.

j. Sealtight 588 Grout; W.R. Meadows, Inc.

k. Sonogrout 14; Sonneborn Building Products--ChemRex, Inc.

l. Kemset; The Spray-Cure Company.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for design,

dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of hollow members, post

spacings, and anchorage, but not less than those required to support structural loads.

B. Assemble handrails and railing systems in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field

splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.

Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Form changes in direction of members as follows:

1. As detailed.

D. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each

repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of pipe throughout entire bend

without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe.

E. Welded Connections (Steel Pipe Railings): Fabricate handrails and railing systems for connection of

members by welding. For connections made during fabrication, weld corners and seams continuously

to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At tee and cross intersections, cope ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe or tube

Page 96: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 6

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

to which end is joined, and weld all around.

5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no

roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

F. Welded Connections (Stainless Steel Pipe Railings): Fabricate handrails and railing systems by

connecting members with railing manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings,

unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline

joints.

G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges,

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing system members to other

construction.

H. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices to connect handrails and railing systems to concrete or

masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by handrails and

railing systems. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

1. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel, not less than 6 inches (150

mm) long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) greater than outside

dimensions of post, and steel plate forming bottom closure.

I. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel pipe whose inside diameter is sized for

a close fit with posts and to limit deflection of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more

than 1/12 of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist accidental

dislodgement.

1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing

sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.

J. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges.

K. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form

bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise

impairing work.

L. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar

items.

M. Provide weepholes, or another means to evacuate entrapped water, in hollow sections of railing

members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources.

N. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.

O. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.

P. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at the edge of open-

sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.

Q. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers, of thickness and size indicated or required to support

Page 97: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 7

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

structural loads of handrails, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to

structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses to produce adequate bearing to prevent

bracket rotation and overstressing substrate.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and

designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering prior to shipment.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable

if they are within one half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece

are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the

range of approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of handrails

and railing systems.

2.7 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES

A. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep

holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorages,

such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, that are

to be embedded in concrete as masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing handrails

and railing systems. Set handrails and railing systems accurately in location, alignment, and elevation,

measured from established lines and levels and free from rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that have been

coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection by mechanical or

other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 12 feet (2 mm in 1 m).

Page 98: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 8

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3. Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of

steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (2 mm in 1 m).

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no

roughness shows after finishing, and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

D. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout,

concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

E. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by design loadings.

F. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for

securing handrails and railing systems and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components by

welding. Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent contact, or use fittings designed for this

purpose.

B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not further apart than required to

accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches (50 mm)

beyond joint on either side; fasten internal sleeve securely to one side; locate joint within 6 inches (150

mm) of post.

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Anchor posts in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been

inserted into sleeves, solidly fill annular space between post and sleeve with the following anchoring

material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions.

1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

B. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and leave 1/8-inch (3-mm)

buildup, sloped away from post.

C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions,

connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For stainless steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.

Page 99: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 9

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

D. Install removable railing sections where indicated in slip-fit metal sockets cast into concrete.

Accurately locate sockets to match post spacing.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean the following metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, followed by rinsing with

clean water.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of handrails and railing systems from damage during construction period with

temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at

time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no evidence remains of

correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required

alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

END OF SECTION

Page 100: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND
Page 101: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Framing with dimension lumber.

2. Wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 05 Section “Cold-Formed Metal Framing” for exterior soffit and sheathing.

2. Division 06 Section 06 20 00 “Finish Carpentry” for non-structural carpentry items exposed to

view and not specified in another Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise

specified.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01

Specification Sections.

B. Product Data for the following products:

1. Air-infiltration barriers

2. Metal framing anchors

3. Construction adhesives

C. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses.

Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber

Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.

D. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling,

storing, installing, and finishing treated materials:

1. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant

stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative

Page 102: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

retained, and compliance with applicable standards.

2. For waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials

was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project Site.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency must

demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to

ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated

without delaying the Work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.

Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and

under temporary coverings.

1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between

each bundle to provide air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Wood-Preservative Treated Materials:

a. Baxter: J.H. Baxter Co.

b. Chemical Specialties, Inc.

c. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc.

d. Hickson Corp.

e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.

f. Osmose Wood Preserving, Inc.

2. Air-Infiltration Barriers

a. Anthony Industries, Inc.; Simplex Products Division.

b. Celotex Corporation (The); Building Products Division.

c. DuPont Company; Fibers Department.

d. Parsec, Inc.

e. Raven Industries, Inc.

f. Reemay, Inc.

g. Sto-Cote Products, Inc.

3. Metal Framing Anchors:

a. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.

Page 103: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

b. Harlen Metal Products, Inc.

c. Silver Metal Products, Inc.

d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc.

e. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.

2.2 LUMBER, GENERAL

A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable

grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.

B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the

following:

1. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.

C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency

evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,

moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.

1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or

omit grade stamps and provide grade-compliance certificates issued by inspection agency.

D. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch

nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply

with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item

with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review.

1. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.

2. For exposed items indicated to receive stained finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed

through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft.

(4.0 kg/cu. m). After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15

percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in

connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with

masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade.

Page 104: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

C. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a

minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft. (6.4 kg/cu. m).

D. Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, apply field

treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying

and discard damaged or defective pieces.

2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the ALSC National Grading Rule

(NGR) provisions of the inspection agency indicated.

1. Grade: Construction, Stud, or No. 3.

2. Species: Southern pine; SPIB.

B. Framing Other than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Provide framing of the following grade and species:

1. Grade: No. 2.

2. Species: Mixed southern pine; SPIB.

C. Other Framing Not Listed Above: Provide the following grades and species:

1. Grade: Construction or No. 2.

2. Species: Southern pine; SPIB.

2.5 BOARDS

A. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber with 19 percent

maximum moisture content and of following species and grade:

1. Species and Grade: Mixed southern pine, No. 2 per SPIB rules.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment

curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar

members.

B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown.

C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative

treatment.

D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 2 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any

species. For board-size lumber, provide No. 2 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA; No. 2

grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any species.

Page 105: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.7 CONCEALED, PERFORMANCE-RATED STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS

A. General: Where structural-use panels are indicated for the following concealed types of applications,

provide APA-performance-rated panels complying with requirements designated under each application for

grade, span rating, exposure durability classification, and edge detail (where applicable).

1. Thickness: Provide panels meeting requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated.

2. Span Ratings: Provide panels with span ratings required to meet "Code Plus" provisions of APA

Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial."

2.8 STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS FOR BACKING

A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant-

treated plywood panels with grade, C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise

indicated, not less than 15/32 inch (11.9 mm) thick.

2.9 FIBROUS-FELTED BOARD

A. Hardboard Underlayment: ANSI/AHA A135.4, Class 4 (Service), Surface S1S; with back side sanded

to produce boards with uniform thickness of 0.215 or 0.200 inch (5.5 or 5 mm), as standard with

manufacturer, plus or minus 0.005 inch (0.13 mm).

1. Class 1 (regular density), size as follows:

a. Size: 1/4 inch thick. Apply 90 to 3/4" tongue and groove plywood underlayment.

2.10 AIR-INFILTRATION BARRIER

A. Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 30 asphalt felt), unperforated.

2.11 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this

Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative

humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304

stainless steel.

B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M)

Page 106: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 6

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with

ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

2.12 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size indicated and

as follows:

1. Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide products for which model code research or

evaluation reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence

compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with building code in effect for

Project.

2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by

manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be

determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by

comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60

(ASTM A 653M, Z180) coating designation; structural, commercial, or lock-forming quality, as

standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated.

C. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or

to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of 2 bolts placed 7 bolt diameters from

reinforced base.

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is

approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers.

B. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-

propynyl butyl carbonate (IPBC) as its active ingredient.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to

use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.

C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate

location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other

construction.

Page 107: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 7

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and

plywood.

E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying

with the following:

1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners.

2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.

3. "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with AFPA's "National

Design Specifications for Wood Construction."

4. "Table 1705.1--Fastening Schedule," of the Standard Building Code.

F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select

fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or

will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without

splitting wood; predrill as required.

G. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground

contact, or in area of high relative humidity.

H. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.

3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS

A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or

attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work.

Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise

indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork

before concrete placement.

C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches

(38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material.

Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's

written instructions.

C. Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports.

Page 108: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 8

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District September 1, 2018

E. Firestop concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling line of top

story. Where firestopping is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2-

inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) thickness lumber of same width as framing members.

END OF SECTION

Page 109: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

FINISH CARPENTRY Section 06 20 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 06 20 00 – FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Stain grade wood, ceilings, and trim at designated areas - #1 T&G yellow pine; 1x6;

stained at interior and at designated exterior locations.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry” for structural wood decking and framing exposed

to view.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the General Conditions of the Contract and

Division 01 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data for each type of factory-fabricated product and process specified, including details of

construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, textures, and

colors.

C. Samples for verification of the following:

1. Lumber and panel products with nonfactory-applied finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for

lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels for each species and cut, with one-half of exposed

surface finished.

D. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products with requirements indicated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed finish carpentry

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of

successful service performance.

Page 110: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

FINISH CARPENTRY Section 06 20 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather

and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air

circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.

B. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements specified

for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only

where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is

enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system

is operation and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels through the

remainder of construction period.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing exterior finish carpentry only when existing and

forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer’s

recommendations and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied

without exposure to rain, snow or dampness.

PART 2 – PRODUCT

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactures offering

products that may be incorporated in the Work are included.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, “American Softwood Lumber Standard,” for lumber

and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards

Committee Board of Review.

B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include

the following:

1. NHLA – National Hardwood Lumber Association.

2. SPIB – Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.

C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection

agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency,

grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing and mill.

Page 111: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

FINISH CARPENTRY Section 06 20 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each

piece or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued

by inspection agency.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size,

material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed

where possible.

1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners

and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153.

B. Glue: Aliphatic- or phenolic-resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry

use.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and

manufacturer’s recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry on relative humidity

conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.

B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

1. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in

finished work:

a. Interior standing and running trim, except shore mold and crown mold.

2. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do no

proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before

installation, for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by

manufacturer.

Page 112: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

FINISH CARPENTRY Section 06 20 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,

inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.

1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.

B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true and aligned with adjacent materials, Use concealed

shims where required for alignment.

1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as

recommended by manufacturer.

2. Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable.

3. Install to tolerance of ⅛-inch in 96-inches for plumb and level. Install adjoining finish

carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum

offset for reveal installation.

4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and

running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate

exposed surfaces of trim and rails.

C. Finish according to specified requirements.

D. Refer to Division 08 Sections for final flashing of finish carpentry.

3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION

A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths

of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger

joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to

produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for

end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provided uniform thickness across joints, if required.

1. Match color and grain pattern across joints.

2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.

3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent

movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill

holes.

4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to

weather.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual

defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform

appearance.

Page 113: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

FINISH CARPENTRY Section 06 20 00 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up factory-applied finishes

to restore damaged or soiled areas.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage or

deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Page 114: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND
Page 115: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 06 40 23 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Laminate-clad cabinets and shelving (plastic-covered casework).

2. Trophy Cases.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division0 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for exposed on concealed framing and for furring,

blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing interior woodwork.

2. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for doors specified by reference to architectural

woodwork standards.

3. Division 09 Section "Painting" for field finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork.

4. Division 06 Section “Solid Surface Fabrication” for library circulation desk tops and splash.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for

installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction prior to woodwork installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections.

B. Product data for each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of

architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.

C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,

attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and an identification

number indicated for each leaf. Identification number shall indicate the flitch and the

sequence within the flitch for each leaf.

Page 116: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

D. Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of

actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for

each type of material indicated.

1. Shop-applied transparent finishes.

2. Shop-applied opaque finishes.

3. Plastic laminates.

4. Solid surfaces.

E. Samples for verification of the following:

1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, 50 sq. in., for each species and cut, finished on one side

and one edge.

2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-finished

woodwork.

3. Wood-veneer-faced panel products, with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each

species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish one-half of face as specified.

4. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 8 by 10 inches for panels and 50

sq. in. for lumber, for each finish system and color, with one-half of exposed surface finished.

5. Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit for each type and finish.

6. Warranty – Operations and care guide for casework.

F. Product certificates signed by woodwork fabricator certifying that products comply with specified

requirements.

G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate

their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and

addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient

production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.

B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for interior architectural woodwork installation by a firm that can

demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and

quality to those required for this Project.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a qualified woodworking firm

to assume undivided responsibility for fabricating, finishing, and installing woodwork specified in

this Section.

D. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard:

1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural

Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and

other requirements.

a. Provide AWI Certification Labels or Certificates of Compliance indicating that

Page 117: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

woodwork meets requirements of grades specified.

E. Warranty – Provide a one (1) year warranty for casework and millwork. Provide lifetime warranty

for Blum Metabox Hardware.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and

deterioration.

B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate

woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than

installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in

"Project Conditions."

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work

is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at

occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual

dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show

recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction

progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support

woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on

final shop drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units

of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported

and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hoffman Millwork; Corpus Christi, Texas

B. Aris Designs; Corpus Christi, Texas

C. Goebel Woodwork; Cuero, Texas

Page 118: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type

of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of interior

woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product

characteristics indicated:

1. Softwood Plywood: PS 1.

2. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.

B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as

required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative

laminates by one of the following:

a. Formica Corporation.

b. Laminart.

c. Nevamar Corp.

d. Pionite Plastics Corp.

e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div.

f. WilsonArt International

C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets,

except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this Section for cabinet hardware required

for architectural cabinets.

C. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA

numbers or referenced to this standard.

D. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with

BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.

E. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class

requirements of BHMA A156.9.

Page 119: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than

15 percent moisture content.

B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME B18.6.1

for applicable requirements.

C. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for

applicable requirements.

D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.

Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls

and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt

devices for drilled-in-place anchors.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality

standard and of the following grade:

1. Grade: Custom.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood

moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in

installation areas.

C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for

the following:

1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) members 3/4 inch thick or less: 1/16

inch.

2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 3/4 inch thick: 1/8 inch.

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to

Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment

and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming,

and fitting.

E. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures,

electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in

diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where

located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-resistant coating.

2.6 LAMINATE-CLAD CABINETS (PLASTIC-COVERED CASEWORK)

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate-clad cabinets.

1. Grade: Custom.

Page 120: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 6

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.

C. Core: Material for cabinet construction to be ¾ inch industrial particleboard except ¾ inch plywood

at all sink cabinets. ¼ inch MDR for backs, shelves over 36 inches to be 1 inch thick. Cabinet bases

to be ladder type separately constructed with Type I glue bond – No particle board.

D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the

following requirements:

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other than Tops: GP-50, 0.050-inch nominal thickness.

2. Postformed Surfaces: PF-42, 0.042-inch nominal thickness.

3. Vertical Surfaces: .030 inch nominal VG - .030.

4. Edges: Matching PVC or HPL .030 inch minimum nominal thickness.

E. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:

1. Surfaces Other than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade GP-28.

2. Doors and Drawers to be balanced construction with HPL liner.

F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of

exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. Match Architect's sample.

2. Match color, pattern, and finish indicated by reference to laminate manufacturer's standard

designations for these characteristics.

3. Provide Architect's selections from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes

in the following categories:

a. Solid colors.

b. Wood grains.

c. Patterns.

2.7 COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops.

1. Grade: Custom.

B. Type of Top: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following:

1. Grade: GP-50, 0.050-inch nominal thickness.

2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and

textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

a. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in

the following categories:

1) Solid colors.

2) Solid colors, with core same color as surface.

3) Wood grains.

4) Patterns.

Page 121: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 7

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.

4. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.

5. Edge Treatment: As indicated.

6. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood. ANSI Type I – SWE MDO Plywood or better.

7. Laminate Backer Sheet: .020 inch minimum thickness.

2.8 SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.

B. General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section, regardless

of whether shop applied or applied after installation.

1. Shop Finishing: To the greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork at the

fabrication shop. Defer only final touch up, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk

fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork,

as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed

surfaces of woodwork, including backs of trim, cabinets, paneling, and ornamental work and

the underside of countertops. Apply 2 coats to back of paneling. Concealed surfaces of

plastic laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic

laminate or thermoset decorative overlay.

D. Washcoat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl washcoat to woodwork made from closed-grain wood

before staining and finishing.

1. Apply vinyl washcoat sealer after staining and before filling.

E. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining,

and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.

1. Grade: Custom.

2. AWI Finish System TR-2: Catalyzed lacquer.

3. Staining: As selected by Architect from the full range of colors available in finish system

specified.

4. Sheen: Semigloss 55-75 gloss units.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing.

Page 122: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 8

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and

complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified

in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.

B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with

concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level (including tops).

C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at

cuts.

D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to

grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required

for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush

with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.

E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length

pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces

less than 36 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.

Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same

as wood base, if finished. Install standing and running trim with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch

variation from a straight line.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are

accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide

unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a

straight line.

2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.

3. Seal all joints at end splashes with clear silicone. Max 1/16” bead.

G. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. Caulk space between

backsplash and wall with specified sealant.

1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a

straight line.

2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c.

H. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to the extent not completed at shop or before

installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish

coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats

were applied in the shop.

Page 123: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 9

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects;

where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore

damaged or soiled areas.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer

that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

3.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE

A. BHMA numbers are used below to designate hardware requirements, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- thick metal, and as follows:

1. Butt Hinges for Flush Doors: B01361.

C. Pulls: Wire pulls, 4 inches long, 1-1/2" deep, and 5/16 inches in diameter. Approved for

Handicapped Accessibility.

D. Catches: Magnetic Catches: B03141.

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards: B04071.

1. Shelf Rests for Standards: B04081.

F. Shelf Rests: B04013.

G. Drawer Boxes – Blum MetaBox System with 5/8” melamine bottoms. Drawer fronts to be plastic

clad.

1. Box Drawer Slides: 75 lbf.

2. File Drawer Slides: 150 lbf. – Full extension

3. Blum Metafile System at file drawers.

H. Door Locks: E07121.

I. Drawer Locks: E07041.

END OF SECTION

Page 124: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND
Page 125: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

WATER REPELLENTS Section 07 19 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 07 19 00 - WATER REPELLENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes installation of clear water-repellent coatings for all newly constructed exterior

masonry surfaces including:

1. Face Brick

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 04 Sections for brick.

2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.

3. Division 07 Sections for fluid-applied waterproofing and dampproofing.

4. Division 09 Section "Painting" for paints and coatings.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide water repellents with the following properties based on testing manufacturer's standard

products, according to test methods indicated, applied to substrates simulating Project conditions using

same materials and application methods to be used for Project.

1. Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of absorption after 24 hours in comparison of

treated and untreated specimens.

a. Brick: ASTM C 67.

b. Stone: ASTM C 97.

c. Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C 140.

d. Hardened Concrete: ASTM C 642.

2. Water-Vapor Transmission: Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in

comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 96.

3. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Maximum 90 percent reduction in leakage

rate in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 514.

4. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water repellency after 2500 hours of weathering in

comparison to specimens before weathering, per ASTM G 53.

5. Permeability: Minimum 80 percent breathable in comparison of treated and untreated

specimens, per ASTM D 1653.

6. Chloride-Ion Intrusion in Concrete: Transportation Research Board, National Research

Council's NCHRP Report 244, Series II tests.

a. Reduction of Water Absorption: 80 percent.

Page 126: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

WATER REPELLENTS Section 07 19 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

b. Reduction in Chloride Content: 80 percent.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application instructions,

recommendations for water repellents for each surface to be treated, and protection and cleaning

instructions. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for

applications indicated and comply with requirements.

B. Field Samples: Of each substrate indicated to receive water repellent, 12 inches (300 mm) square, with

specified repellent treatment applied to half of each sample.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of pollution-control regulatory agency having

jurisdiction in Project locale regarding VOCs and use of hydrocarbon solvents.

B. Field Samples: Architect will select one representative surface for each substrate to receive water

repellents. Apply water repellent to each substrate, with either partial or full coverage as directed.

Comply with application requirements of this Section. *Obtain Architect's approval of field samples

before applying water repellents.

1. Maintain field samples during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent under any of the

following conditions, except with written instruction of manufacturer:

1. Ambient temperature is less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

2. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for less than 28 days.

3. Rain or temperatures below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) are predicted within 24 hours.

4. Application is earlier than 24 hours after surfaces have been wet.

5. Substrate is frozen, or surface temperature is less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

6. Windy condition exists that may cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces

not intended to be coated.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the applicator and water repellent

manufacturer, covering materials and labor, agreeing to repair or replace materials that fail to provide

water repellency within the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or

failure of coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate,

formation of new joints and cracks in excess of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) wide, fire, vandalism, or abuse by

maintenance equipment.

Page 127: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

WATER REPELLENTS Section 07 19 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into

the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Siloxanes: With more than 3.3 lb/gal. (400 g/L) VOCs.

a. Prime-A-Pell 200; Chemprobe Technologies, Inc.

b. Euco-Guard 200; Euclid Chemical Company (The).

c. Thorosiloxane-8S; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents.

Test for moisture content, according to repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure surface

is sufficiently dry.

1. Formed Concrete: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that could

prevent adhesion or penetration of water repellents.

2. Clay Brick Masonry: Clean clay brick masonry per ASTM D 5703.

B. Test for pH level, according to water repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure chemical

bond to silicate minerals.

C. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent.

Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent

being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass.

D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces

receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.

1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and

compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant

materials identical to those used in the work.

E. Test Application: Before performing water-repellent work, including bulk purchase and delivery of

products, prepare a small application in an unobtrusive location and in a manner approved by Architect

to demonstrate the final effect (visual, physical, and chemical) of planned application. Proceed with

work only after Architect approves test application or as otherwise directed.

Page 128: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

WATER REPELLENTS Section 07 19 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1. Revisions of planned application, if any, as requested by Architect, will be by Change Order if

they constitute a departure from requirements of Contract Documents at the time of

contracting.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply a heavy-saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low-

pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for using airless spraying

procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's

written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces

between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable

to Project conditions.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Protective Coverings: Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas.

B. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-

repellent application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by water-repellent application.

Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.

END OF SECTION

Page 129: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

BUILDING INSULATION Section 07 21 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 07 21 00 - BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Rigid board cavity wall insulation

2. Fiberglass insulation at ceilings and soffits where scheduled.

3. Slag/Rock wool insulation between roof deck and top of walls.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for coordination of insulation installed in cavity walls.

2. Division 07 Section for coordination of insulation installed in cavity wall and “Fluid Applied

Water Barrier”.

3. Division 07 Section “Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing” for insulation specified as part of

roofing construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections.

B. Product Data for each type of insulation product specified.

C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency

evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including those for thermal

resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission, water absorption, and other

properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a

single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without

delaying the Work.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response

characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as determined by testing

identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency

Page 130: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

BUILDING INSULATION Section 07 21 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of

applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.

3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and

other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for

handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and

concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site

before installation time.

3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area

of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering insulation

products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation:

a. CertainTeed Corporation.

b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.

c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.

d. Schuller International, Inc.

2. Slag-Wool-/Rock-Wool-Fiber Insulation:

a. Fibrex Inc.

b. Partek Insulations, Inc.

c. USG Interiors, Inc.

3. Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulation Board:

a. Celotex

2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.

1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard

thicknesses, widths, and lengths.

Page 131: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

BUILDING INSULATION Section 07 21 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. Unfaced Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation combining glass fibers with

thermosetting resin binders, unfaced; comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA; or with ASTM C 553,

Types I, II, and III; and with other requirements indicated below:

1. Nominal Density: 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m).

2. Thermal Resistivity: 4.13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (28.6 K x m/W at

24 deg C).

3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25

and 50, respectively.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of

Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions

affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing

projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment.

B. Close off openings in cavities receiving poured-in-place insulation to prevent escape of insulation.

Provide bronze or stainless-steel screens (inside) where openings must be maintained for drainage or

ventilation.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application

indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and

snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly

around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise

shown or required to make up total thickness.

Page 132: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

BUILDING INSULATION Section 07 21 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method, complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

Bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement

and support of units.

B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant

to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed

installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise

indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.

1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder and seal each continuous area of insulation to

surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

D. Set reflective, foil-faced units with not less than 0.75-inch (19-mm) air space in front of foil as

indicated.

E. Install board insulation on concrete masonry substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation

anchors as follows:

1. Cut insulation boards to fit tightly between masonry anchorage system (16” o.c.). Adhere

insulation board or mechanically fasten insulation at areas without continuous masonry

anchorage.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission.

Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover

miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten vapor

retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints.

Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to vapor

retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor-retarder tape.

Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.

D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by

vapor retarder manufacturer.

E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders

with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.

F. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.

Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.

Page 133: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

BUILDING INSULATION Section 07 21 00 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.4 PROTECTION

A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather

exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where

insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction

immediately after installation.

3.5 SCHEDULE OF INSULATION TYPES

A. Exterior Stud Walls – unfaced fiberglass batt insulation

B. Insulation in interior drywall partitions. Thickness as indicated in the Drawings.

C. Rigid glass fiber reinforced polyisocyanurate foam insulation board with foil face on both sides. Total

thickness as designated in the Drawings. R Value = 8 per inch.

D. Above soffits at scheduled locations, only 6” thick unfaced fiberglass insulation.

END OF SECTION

Page 134: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND
Page 135: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM Section 07 22 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 07 22 00 – TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Mechanically fastened tapered polyisocyanurate insulation for roof surface, roof crickets and back

slope to roof gutter system.

1.2 RELATED SECTION

A. Section 01410 – Windstorm Construction Requirements

B. Section 06 10 00 – Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood nailers.

C. Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Weather protection to base flashings.

D. Section 07 54 00 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing

E. Section 07 72 00 – Prefabricated Roofing Specialties.

F. Section 22 11 19 – Plumbing Specialties.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/.ASTM D41 – Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing.

B. ASNI/ASTM D312 – Asphalt Used in Roofing.

C. ANSI/ASTM D2178 – Asphalt Impregnated Glass (Felt) Mat Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.

D. Factory Mutual (FM) Engineering Corporation – Roof Assembly Classifications.

E. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) – Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) – Fire Hazard Classifications.

G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) – Wind Up-Lift Requirements.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Fully adhered tapered insulation system over 3-inch thick mechanically fastened rigid installation.

Install coverboard slope to be ¼-inch per foot typical and ⅛-inch per foot at crickets. Minimum

thickness to be 1 ½” at edge nailer at all sides of each building.

Page 136: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM Section 07 22 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Create adequate slope to direct all roof water to roof top drainage system.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Provide insulation and bitumen materials.

C. Submittals: Dimensioned Roof top plan indicating materials and thickness.

D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions.

E. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with

minimum five years documented experience and listed by name in this specification.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying bituminous and thermoplastic roofing with minimum

five years documented experience and approved by materials manufacturer for a minimum of one year

prior to bid date.

C. Work of this Section to conform to NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer’s

instructions. No roof membrane penetrations which do not conform to NRCA details will be allowed

to be installed or to remain in place. Pitch pans will not be allowed for any reason.

1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to 2012 Edition of International Building Code for roof assembly and fire hazard

requirements.

B. Fire Hazard Classification: UL Class A.

C. Roof Assembly Classification: UL I-90 Wind Up-Lift Requirements and Texas Windstorm

requirements – construct to meet or exceed Inland 1 uplift requirements.

1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene a pre-installation conference one week prior to commencing work on this Section.

B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

Page 137: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM Section 07 22 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.

B. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact.

C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.

1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply insulation during inclement weather.

B. Do not apply insulation to damp or frozen deck surface.

C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be

weatherproofed during same day.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01045.

B. Coordinate the work with installation of associated materials as the work of this Section proceeds.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty with roofing system specified in Section 07 54 00.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION

A. Hunter.

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

Page 138: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM Section 07 22 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.2 INSULATION

A. Insulation: Mechanically Fastened Tapered Polyisocyanurate Insulation board; with the following

characteristics:

Board Slope: ½-inch per foot to achieve ½-inch slope to roof drains from parapet

Board Size: 24 x 48-inch

Board Thickness Varies

Thermal Resistance: Minimum aged R-value = 5.6 per inch thickness

Board Edges: Square

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.

B. Verify coverboard is supported and secured.

C. Verify coverboard is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped.

D. Verify deck surfaces are clean and dry.

E. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set.

3.2 TAPERED INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Mechanically attach first layer of insulation to deck. Install tapered insulation and coverboard with

adhesive, in accordance with insulation manufacturer’s instructions. Lay coverboard of insulation with

joints staggered from first layer.

B. Minimum Insulation Thickness: 1 ½-inch base insulation, excluding coverboard.

C. Lay insulation boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to

perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof.

D. Lay tapered boards as indicated on roof plans to achieve crickets.

E. Place coverboard perpendicular to insulation board, stagger joints.

F. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day.

G. Tape joints of insulation (if required for UL ratings or manufacturer’s warranty) in accordance with

insulation manufacturer’s instructions.

Page 139: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM Section 07 22 00 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.3 MEMBRANE APPLICATION

A. See Section 07 54 00 “Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing”

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.

B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces

for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.

C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.

B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces.

END OF SECTION

Page 140: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND
Page 141: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

VAPOR BARRIER Section 07 26 13 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 07 26 13 - VAPOR BARRIER

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Installation of a vapor barrier under concrete building foundations.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 23 23 – Fill and Backfill

B. Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Forms and Accessories

C. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E 1643-94: Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with

Earth Under Concrete Slabs.

B. ASTM E 1745: Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with Earth Under

Concrete Slabs – Exceeds Class B.

C. ASTM E 96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 1995.

D. GRI-GS 1-86: Puncture Resistant

E. ASTM D 1709: Standard Test Methods for Puncture Resistance

F. ASTM D 638: Standard Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Plastic; 1996

G. ASTM D 1790: Standard Test Methods for Low Temperature Brittleness.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Specification Section 01300 – “Submittals” for administrative requirements and submittal

procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s printed product literature and description, including tests and

standards that have been performed on the vapor barrier material.

C. Samples: Submit two (2), 8 ½” x 11” in size, illustrating the vapor barrier and two (2), 8 ½” long

sample strips of the joint tape.

D. One (1) each of all accessories that will be used in the installation.

Page 142: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

VAPOR BARRIER Section 07 26 13 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

E. Verification by independent testing laboratories indicating that materials comply with specified

requirements.

F. Certificates: Certify that products of this Section meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Indicate complete installation instructions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

Section, with not less than three (3) years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum

five (5) years’ experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver Vapor Barrier to project site in manufacturer’s original container/packaging.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate Vapor Barrier installation with size, location and installation of service utilities.

B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Xtreme Vapor Barrier; P. O. Box 58, Channelview, Texas 77530. Customer Service: Telephone (713)

481-3415

1. Contacts:

a. Local Rep: Mike Johnson – Telephone (361) 774-1482

b. Sales Manager: Greg Jones – Telephone (713) 481-3413

c. Specs: Amy McNair – Telephone (713) 481-3442

B. W.R. Meadows, Perminator 20 mil. as an approved equal. Telephone (800) 342-5976

C. No substitutions will be considered without prior approval prior to bid date.

Page 143: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

VAPOR BARRIER Section 07 26 13 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Vapor Barrier

1. Extruded 20 mil polyolefin membrane.

2. Material manufactured with ISO certified virgin resins.

3. Sheet polyethylene is not acceptable.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Tape

1. High Density Polyethylene Tape, manufactured by same manufacturer, with pressure

sensitive adhesive. Minimum width: 4”.

B. Pipe Boot

1. Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape per

manufacturer’s instructions or manufacturer mastic.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

A. Reference Standards

1. Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs: Exceeds Class B

according to ASTM E 1745.

2. Water Vapor Transmission Rates: 0.006 gr/ft²/hr according to ASTM E 96

3. Permeance Rating Result: 0.01 gr/ft²/hr according to ASTM E96

4. Puncture Resistance Result: 204.0-lbs/sq ft according to GRI-GS 1-86

5. Puncture Resistance Result: 1972.5 grams according to ASTM D 1709

6. Tensile Strength Result: 54.2-lbs / MD and 55.5-lbs / CMD according to ASTM D 638,

ASTM E 154

7. Low Temperature Brittleness: Pass according to ASTM D 1790

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditions are acceptable for the placement of the vapor barrier.

B. Architect/Engineer shall be notified to inspect Vapor Barrier prior to installation of rebar.

C. Manufacturer representative shall inspect after installation with written letter report.

Page 144: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

VAPOR BARRIER Section 07 26 13 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that subsoil is compacted and approved by Geotechnical Consultant.

1. Vapor Barrier may be installed over an aggregate, sand or tamped or earth base.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install Vapor Barrier per manufacturer’s instruction, illustrations and ASTM E 1643-94: Standard

Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs.

1. Level and tamp or roll granular base.

2. Place Vapor Barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour.

3. Lap Vapor Barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls. Seal all penetrations.

4. Lap joints 6” and seal with the recommended pressure sensitive tape.

5. Seal pipe penetrations with pipe boot made from Vapor Barrier and tape.

6. Protect Vapor Barrier from damage during installation of reinforcing steel and utilities.

7. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of Vapor Barrier, overlapping damaged area 6” and

taping all 4 sides with pressure sensitive tape.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK

A. Coordinate work with all other trades related to the slab base and utility services.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean all contaminants from surface.

B. Protect installed vapor barrier from subsequent damaging construction operations.

C. Do not permit vehicular/heavy equipment traffic over unprotected Vapor Barrier.

END OF SECTION

Page 145: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 07 27 26 – FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fluid-applied, vapor permeable weather barrier membrane on soffit and wall sheathing, wood

nailers/blocking and all exterior faces of concrete masonry units.

B. Joint Tape

C. Flashing

1. Vapor Permeable Elastomeric Flashing

2. Flexible Flashing

3. Sheet Flashing

D. Joint Compound

E. Sealant

F. Primers for flexible flashing and sheet flashing

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International

1. ASTM C 1250 – Standard Test Method for Nonvolatile Content of Cold Liquid-Applied

Elastomeric Waterproofing Membranes.

2. ASTM D 412 – Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers

– Tension.

3. ASTM D 2240 – Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness.

4. ASTM D 4541 – Standard Test Method for Pull-off Strength of Coatings Using Portable

Adhesion Testers.

5. ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

6. ASTM E 96 - Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

7. ASTM E 283 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through

Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences Across the

Specimen.

8. ASTM E 331 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylight,

Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differences.

9. ASTM E 779 – Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan

Pressurization.

10. ASTM E 783 – Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage through

Installed Exterior Windows and Doors.

11. ASTM E 1105 – Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of

Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static

Air Pressure Difference.

Page 146: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

12. ASTM E 1186 – Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and

Air Barrier Systems.

13. ASTM E 1677 - Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building

Walls.

14. ASTM E 2178 – Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials

15. ASTM E 2357 – Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier

Assemblies.

16. ASTM G155 – Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of

Non-Metallic Materials

B. AATCC – American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists.

1. Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test.

C. TAPPI

1. Test Method T-460; Air Resistance of Paper (Gurley Hill Method).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01300 “Submittals”.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current technical literature for each component.

C. Quality Assurance Submittals:

1. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance

with indicated requirements.

2. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

3. Manufacturer’s Field Service Reports: Provide site reports from authorized filed service

representative, indicating observation of weather barrier system installation.

D. Closeout Submittals:

1. Refer to Section 01700 “Contract Closeout”.

2. Weather Barrier Warranty: Manufacturer’s executed warranty form with authorized signatures

and endorsements indicating date of Substantial Completion.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications:

1. Installer shall have experience with installation of commercial fluid-applied weather barrier

assemblies under similar conditions.

2. Installer shall be trained and certified for installation by manufacturer.

B. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.

Page 147: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

C. Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer.

D. Mock-up:

1. Install mock-up using approved weather barrier system including membrane, flashing, joint

and detailing compound and related weather barrier accessories according to weather barrier

manufacturer’s current printed instructions and recommendations.

a. Mock-up Size: 10 feet x 10 feet

b. Mock-up Substrate: Match wall assembly construction, including window opening.

c. Mock-up may not remain as part of the work.

2. Contact manufacturer’s designated representative prior to weather barrier system installation,

to perform required mock-up visual inspection and analysis as required for warranty.

E. Pre-installation Meeting:

1. Refer to Section 01200 Project Meetings.

2. Hold a pre-installation conference, two weeks prior to start of weather barrier installation.

Attendees shall include Contractor, Architect, certified installer, Owner’s Representative, and

weather barrier manufacturer’s designated field representative.

3. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and

preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather equipment,

facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements

for full and proper installation, integration and protection.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Refer to Section 01600 “Materials and Equipment”.

B. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged

containers with identification labels intact.

C. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by manufacturer.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier system with installation of

windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier system.

B. Schedule installation of exterior cladding within nine months of weather barrier system installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section 01740 “Warranties”.

B. Limited Warranty

Page 148: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1. Manufacturer's warranty for weather barrier for a period of ten (10) years from date of

Purchase.

2. Pre-installation meeting and jobsite observations by weather barrier manufacturer for

warranty are required.

3. Warranty Areas: Base course flashing, liquid applied weather barriers on masonry and

plywood sheathing, and flashing, and seals at all wall penetrations and seals to roof deck.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 WEATHER BARRIER

A. Manufacturer: DuPont Building Innovations; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 728,

Wilmington, DE 19805; 1.800.44TYVEK (8-9835); http://weatherization.tyvek.com

1. Description: A single-component, low VOC, 25 mil thick synthetic polymer fluid-applied

product with superior elasticity and flexibility providing resistance to air flow, bulk water and

wind driven rain yet allows moisture vapor to escape.

2. Basis of Design: DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied WB System; including DuPont™ Tyvek®

Fluid Applied WB, DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound, DuPont™

Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing – Brush Grade and DuPont™ Sealant for Tyvek® Fluid

Applied Systems.

B. Performance Characteristics:

1. Air Penetration: 0.0002 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E 2178. Type I per ASTM E 1677 and ≤ 0.01 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance

with ASTM E 2357.

2. Water Vapor Transmission: 25 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E 96, Method B at 25 mils DFT (Dry Film Thickness).

3. Water Penetration Resistance: Greater than 1000 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC

Test Method 127. No leakage at 15 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331.

4. Air Resistance: Air infiltration greater than 10,000 seconds per 100cc, when tested in

accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460.

5. Tensile Strength: Minimum 169 lbs/in2, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412.

6. Estimated Elongation: 420% in accordance with ASTM D 412.

7. Hardness: Passes at a Shore A hardness of 71, when tested in accordance with ASTM D

2240.

8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E 84. Flame Spread: 25, Smoke Developed: 25.

9. Accelerated Weathering: 9 month exposure of membrane to ultraviolet light (UV) in

accordance with ASTM G 155.

10. Volatile Organic Content (VOC): Less than 2% when measured in accordance with ASTM

C 1250.

11. Adhesion Strength (Concrete): Greater than 33 psi when measured in accordance with ASTM

D 4541

Page 149: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Tape: Self-adhered fiberglass mesh tape as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

B. Flashing:

1. Vapor permeable elastomeric flashing:

a. Product: DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing – Brush Grade as manufactured by

DuPont™.

2. Flexible flashing with butyl adhesive layer.

a. Product: DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF.

3. Sheet flashing with butyl adhesive layer.

a. Product: DuPont™ StraightFlash™.

C. Joint Compound: Fluid-applied, vapor permeable, elastomeric flashing material; trowel applied.

1. Product: DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound.

D. Sealant:

1. Product: DuPont™ Sealant for Tyvek® Fluid Applied Systems.

E. Primers for flexible flashing and sheet flashing:

1. Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate

and flashing.

2. Products:

a. 3M High Strength 90

b. Denso Butyl Spray

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer

recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete surface preparation, priming, flashing and detailing of openings, cracks, and material

transitions prior to beginning installation of fluid-applied weather barrier system.

B. Surfaces shall be clean and free of frost, oil, grease, mold and efflorescence prior to application of

fluid-applied weather barrier system.

Page 150: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 6

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.3 INSTALLATION – DETAILING

A. Corners: Apply primer to outside and inside corners, extend 2 inches on each side of corner. Center

sheet flashing over corner and press firmly in place per manufacturer’s recommendations. Apply ½

inch fillet bead of joint compound applied to full-height of inside corners.

B. Joint Treatment:

1. Sheathing:

a. Joints shall be prepared per manufacturer’s approved joint treatment details.

b. Apply joint tape as recommended by fluid-applied weather barrier manufacturer.

1) No joint treatment required for joints up to 1/16 inch.

2) Joints 1/16 to 1/4 inch: Joint compound applied to form a 1 inch width on each

side of sheathing joint; smooth joint compound across sheathing joint. Thickness

shall be 15 to 25 mils.

3) Joints 1/16 to 1/2 inch: Apply joint tape to bridge both sides of joint equally.

Apply joint compound and trowel smooth embedding joint compound uniformly

into joint tape to form a 1 inch width on each side of sheathing joint at a consistent

thickness of 15 to 25 mils.

4) Joints 1/2 to 1 inch: Apply sheet flashing primer above and below sheathing joint.

Center sheet flashing over sheathing joint and press firmly in place per

manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Non-movement joints in masonry and transitions to columns and beams:

a. Joints 1/4 inch wide or less: Apply joint compound a minimum of 2 inches wide by 60

mils thick to each side of joint or crack.

b. Joints 1/4 to 1/2 inch: Apply primer 2 inches on each side of joint. Center sheet flashing

over joint and press firmly in place per manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Apply joint compound to cladding anchors prior to installation of weather barrier membrane per

manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Apply joint compound around penetrations in exterior walls forming a fillet bead minimum ½ inch

onto each surface

E. Installation – Flexible flashing at openings:

1. Prime substrates as recommended by self-adhered sheet membrane flashing manufacturer. Cut

sheet membrane flashing a minimum of 12 inches longer than length of sill rough opening.

2. Cover horizontal sill by aligning sheet membrane edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to

rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure sheet membrane

tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs.

3. Fan sheet membrane at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place.

4. Apply 9-inch wide strips of sheet membrane at jambs. Align sheet membrane with interior

edge of jamb framing. Start sheet membrane at head of opening and lap sheet membrane at

sill.

5. Install sheet membrane at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill.

Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches.

6. Coordinate flashing with fluid-applied weather barrier and window installation

Page 151: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 7

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

F. Allow Flashing, Joint Compound and Sealant to cure for minimum 24 hours before coating with Fluid-

applied Weather Barrier

3.4 INSTALLATION – FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER

A. Install fluid-applied weather barrier prior to installation of windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Mask and protect any adjacent finished surfaces from fluid-applied weather barrier material.

C. Install fluid-applied weather barrier over exterior face of required exterior wall substrates in

accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommendations and instructions.

D. Install fluid-applied weather barrier by pressure rolling method to achieve 25 mils providing a

consistent and uniform thickness.

E. Repair any voids, holidays, or non-uniform installations or damage by other trades to proper mil

thickness prior to installation of final cladding assemblies

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Notify weather barrier manufacturer’s designated representative to obtain [required] periodic

observations of weather barrier system installation.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections as

required in Contract Documents.

C. Inspections: Weather barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for

compliance with performance requirements.

D. Tests: As determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests:

1. Quantitative Air-Leakage Testing: Weather barrier assemblies will be tested for air leakage

according to ASTM E 783.

2. Qualitative Air-Leakage Testing: Weather barrier assemblies will be tested for air leakage

according to ASTM E 779.

3. Qualitative Water-Leakage Testing: Weather barrier assemblies will be tested for water

leakage according to ASTM E 1105.

4. Qualitative Air-Leakage Testing: Weather barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of

air leakage according to ASTM E 1186.

E. Weather barriers assemblies will be considered defective upon failure of inspections and specific

project testing required.

1. Apply additional fluid-applied weather barrier material, in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness, voids, skips, pinholes or

other defects as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

2. Remove and replace deficient weather barrier system components for retesting as specified

above.

Page 152: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 8

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

F. Repair damage to weather barriers caused by destructive testing; follow manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect weather barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved per

weather barrier manufacturer’s recommendation.

B. Protect installed weather barrier system from damage during construction prior to cladding installation.

1. If damaged or exposed to UV beyond nine (9) months, clean and prepare surfaces and install

additional, full-thickness, fluid-applied weather barrier application in accordance with

weather barrier manufacturer's instructions.

C. Remove masking materials and adjacent protection after weather barrier installation.

END OF SECTION

Page 153: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 07 54 00 -THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING (PVC)

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Qualifications, Standards and Materials for new roof assembly.

2. Cleaning existing roof deck surface.

3. Roof insulation and coverboard

4. Adhered membrane roofing system.

5. Traffic pads.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section 01785 “Applicator Warranty”

2. Division 01 Section “Windstorm Construction Requirements”

3. Division 06 Section “Carpentry Work (for Roofing)" for wood nailers, curbs, grounds, and

blocking.

4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings,

flashings, and counterflashing.

5. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

6. Division 07 Section “Tapered Roof Insulation”

7. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants (for Roofing)."

8. Division 23 Section “Basic Materials and Methods” for procedures for modifying, repairing,

or replacing roof mounted plumbing, piping and mechanical equipment and replacement of

roof mounted piping.

9. Division 26 “Basic Materials and Methods” for procedures for modifying, repairing or

replacing roof mounted electrical equipment and devices, and repair or replacement of roof

mounted electrical items.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A 653 -Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (galvanized) by the Hot-Dip process, Structural (Physical)

Quality Property.

2. C 1289 -Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.

3. D 1079 -Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing, and Bituminous Materials.

Page 154: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): ASCE 7-98: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and

Other Structures

C. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.

D. Single Ply Roofing Institute (SPRI): Flexible Membrane Roofing: A Professional's Guide to

Specifications, "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing

Systems.”

E. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL): Fire Hazard Classifications.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and

Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

B. Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in SPRI's "Wind Load

Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems," before multiplication

by a safety factor.

C. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing System: Mechanically fastened insulation system, fully adhered

single-ply roof membrane system.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit

the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure

to weather without failure.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under

conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer

based on testing and field experience.

C. Roofing System Design: Provide a membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have

been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated

according to ASCE 7.

1. Corner Uplift Pressure: 147 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 97 lbf/sq. ft.

3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 58 lbf/sq. ft.

4. Design Windspeed: 120 miles-per-hour (3 second gust).

5. Exposure Category: C.

6. Importance Factor: 1.15.

D. Products must be listed and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance as complying with all

requirements of the Texas Windstorm Code for Inland Zone-1.

Page 155: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit list of proposed Products and manufacturers, including all items specified in Part

2 – Products or otherwise required by the Work.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to

other Work.

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.

2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.

3. Insulation fastening patterns.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. 12-by-12-inch square of sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap

seam.

2. 12-by-12-inch square of roof insulation.

3. 12-by-12-inch square of walkway pads or rolls.

E. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,

authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.

F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies

with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.

2. Qualifications: Certify and document items in Article on Qualifications, and;

3. Products: Certify that selected products and roofing system meet or exceed specified

requirements, including that;

a. Roofing system components are physically and chemically compatible for

installation as designed, and;

b. All proposed materials, including those by other manufacturers, are acceptable to

membrane manufacturer for use in the system.;

c. Proposed system meets all criteria for issuance of required manufacturer’s warranty,

and;

d. Specifically identify and define any deviations.

4. Applicator: Certify that installation Contractor is approved by manufacturer for installation of

selected products and list foremen who have received training from manufacturer with dates

training was received.

G. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and

witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system.

I. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system.

Page 156: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

J. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation sequence, special instructions and Material

Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

K. Daily Inspection Form: Check list document or form with signature line for Project Manager or

Superintendent, signifying installation is in accordance with specified requirements, and tie-ins and

temporary flashings are properly sealed at end of each working day and as otherwise required to ensure

water-tightness.

L. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Summarize findings of each inspection. Indicate any discrepancies from

recommended installation methods, corrective action recommended to installer, and any non-compliant

or unsatisfactory conditions.

M. Project Record Documents: Accurately record exact location of all roof membrane penetrations.

N. Maintenance Data: For completed roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.

O. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

P. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing

installation.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing for membrane roofing

system identical to that used for this Project, with minimum five years documented experience,

including:

1. Minimum three (3) projects of comparable size, using specified system, installed in the State

of Texas within that five-year period.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that has been continuously approved, authorized, or licensed

by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product for minimum of three years prior to

Bid Date, and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty; with minimum five years documented

experience, including:

1. Certified by roofing materials manufacturer as an approved NDL applicator for minimum of

two years prior to Bid Date, and qualified to provide specified warranty on selected systems

and flashings.

2. Minimum three projects of comparable size and specified systems during that time.

3. Company certified by the fume recovery system manufacturer as trained or approved to

properly operate and maintain selected equipment.

C. Workers: All roofers and laborers to be direct employees of Primary Contractor.

1. Project Manager and Superintendent: Minimum five years roofing experience and employed

by Contractor for a minimum one year prior to Bid Date.

2. Non-Working Supervisor: Able to communicate effectively with School staff and

Applicator’s workers and employed by Contractor for a minimum one year prior to Bid Date.

Page 157: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

Present on job site at all times Work is in progress.

3. Tradesmen: Minimum 50-percent of installation crew to have been employed by Contractor

for a minimum six months prior to Bid Date.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from or approved by roofing

membrane manufacturer.

B. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Manual of Roof Maintenance and Roof Repair, NRCA

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, and manufacturer's instructions.

C. Maintain one copy of each document accessible to site.

D. Install all roofing materials using personnel directly employed by Applicator (Roofing Contractor)

with NDL certification from roofing material manufacturer -no Sub-Contracting permitted.

E. Assign a qualified, full time, non-working supervisor to be on Project site at all times during

installation of Work.

F. Designate a responsible Project Manager or Superintendent to inspect all installed Work, particularly

tie-ins and temporary flashings, at end of each working day and as otherwise required to ensure water-

tightness.

1. Verify Inspection by signature on approved Daily Inspection Form signifying installation is in

accordance with specified requirements.

G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division

01 Section "Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but

not limited to, the following:

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency

representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer,

and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof

accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's

written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including

flatness and fastening.

5. Review demolition procedures and coordination with related work.

6. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

7. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment

curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.

8. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

9. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.

10. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

Page 158: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 6

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable local codes for roof assembly fire hazard requirements and application

procedures.

B. Provide certification of inspection confirming approval of design and installation by authority having

jurisdiction.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-response

characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL,

FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials

shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated.

D. Comply with all submission requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Division

for Inland Zone-1.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with

manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and

mixing with other components.

1. Inspect for damage. Remove from site and replace any damaged materials.

2. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.

3. Stand and store roll materials on end.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and

within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material

from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf

life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture,

soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written

instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of

deck.

1. Do not store more materials on roof than can be installed within two days, unless specifically

approved otherwise.

2. Maximum Allowable Loading on Roof: 20 pounds per square foot.

Page 159: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 7

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on site at all times during Work.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions

permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty

requirements.

1. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when threat of inclement

weather exists.

2. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface.

3. Observe wind chill and other cold weather conditions for proper bituminous application.

C. Observe actual and predicted temperatures, relative humidity, wind, wind chill and other weather

conditions. Apply roofing system only when all conditions are within ranges acceptable to membrane

manufacturer.

D. Do not permit contaminants such as grease, fats and oils to come in direct contact with roofing

membrane.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with demolition work and with work of other trades to ensure sufficient materials and

manpower are available to completely replace and make watertight all roofing removed each day.

B. Limit tear off of existing roof system and application of new base sheet (if required), including

insulation, to amount that can be completely covered with new roof system by end of day.

C. Coordinate installation of associated metal flashings, and roof-related items as work of this Section

proceeds. Seal all sheet metal flanges in contact with membrane the day it is installed.

D. Schedule and execute Work to prevent leaks and excessive traffic on completed roof sections. Provide

protection for interior of building and to ensure water does not flow beneath any completed membrane

system sections.

E. Schedule work to avoid storage on and traffic over finished work.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.

1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories,

roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, walkway products, and other

components of membrane roofing system.

2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

Page 160: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 8

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section,

signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing

system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate

boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product

selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

manufacturers specified.

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

manufacturers specified.

2.2 PVC ROOFING MEMBRANE

A. PVC Sheet: ASTM D 4434, Type III, fabric reinforced.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Sarnafil, Inc: Sikaplan Adhered / RC-543

b. IB Roof Systems: IB-PVC Single Ply / RC-243

c. Johns Manville: JM PVC 60 / RC-471

2. Thickness: 60-mils, nominal; plus or minus 2.0-mils.

3. Exposed Face Color: White.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and

compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement,

thickness, and color as PVC sheet membrane.

C. Pre-Fabricated Penetration Flashings: Components prefabricated from same reinforced thermoplastic

material as roofing membrane, or as recommended by membrane sheet manufacturer.

Page 161: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 9

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard solvent-based bonding adhesive for membrane, and

solvent-based bonding adhesive for base flashings.

E. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.

F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance

provisions in FMG 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate; tested by

manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

1. Corrosion Resistant Coating: Pass minimum 30 Kesternich cycles.

2. Membrane Fasteners: Designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to

membrane roofing system manufacturer; sized to meet requirements to resist wind up-lift

pressures specified in Part 1 “Performance Requirements” of this Section.

a. Wood Blocking: High carbon, zinc coated steel; annular threaded 1-inch shank nails;

with minimum 1-inch x 30 gage metal disk; Roofing Nail, manufactured by Simplex

Nails, Inc.

b. Concrete: Power actuated fasteners, suitable for application.

G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,

approximately 1 by 1/8-inch-thick; with anchors.

H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,

preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips,

and other accessories.

I. Membrane Termination Sealant: Compatible with membrane and materials to which membrane to be

bonded, conforming to Federal Specifications TT-598 and TT-S-00230C; approved by membrane

manufacturer.

J. Water Cut-Off Mastic: Compatible with materials with which it is used and approved by membrane

manufacturer.

K. Night Seal: Compatible with materials on which it is used and approved by membrane manufacturer.

L. Pitch Pocket Sealant: Single component, self-leveling silicone sealant approved by membrane

manufacturer.

M. Expansion Joint Filler:

1. Flexible Vapor Retarder: Minimum 60 mil thick vinyl sheet or approved equal.

2. Compressible Insulation: Fiberglass batt insulation or approved equal.

2.4 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced

standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major

surfaces; Class 1, Grade 3 rigid polyisocyanurate based closed-cell foam; CRC free; with appropriate

Page 162: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 10

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

facer to accommodate placement within cold adhered roof system; with following characteristics:

1. Board density: 2 pounds per cubic foot

2. Compressive Strength 20 pounds per square inch minimum

3. Board size: 48 x 48 inch

4. Board Thickness: 3-inch thickness minimum – thickness varies to achieve ¼-inch per foot at

back slope. Typical ½-inch per foot slope at crickets.

a. Roof structure slope is ¼-inch per foot. Back slope must be ½-inch per foot when

sloping to roof drain.

5. Thermal Conductivity: K factor of 0.36

6. Aged Thermal Value: R of 5.5 per inch minimum

7. Board Edges: Square

8. Manufacturers:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.

b. Hunter Materials Corporation

c. Johns Manville International, Inc.

d. RMAX

C. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water resistant gypsum substrate, ½-inch thick.

1. Dens-Deck Rigid, cover board. No substitutions.

a. Board Size: 48 x 48-inches

b. Board Thickness: ½-inch

c. Board Edges: Square

D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 3 rigid

polyisocyanurate insulation boards with the same characteristics as above; fabricated to slope of ⅛-

inch per 12-inches, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated

for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

1. Cricket and Saddle Taper: 1/2-inch per foot minimum, or as required to counter existing roof

slope plus 1/2-per foot slope toward drains.

2. Edge Strips: Tapered as required by installation conditions.

2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and

compatible with membrane roofing.

B. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to

adhere roof insulation to substrate.

Page 163: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 11

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.6 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-

textured walkway pads or rolls, minimum ⅛-inch thick, compatible with membrane and acceptable to

membrane roofing system manufacturer. Color: Gray.

1. Pad Size: 12 x 30-inches

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with following

requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains

are securely clamped in place.

a. Verify that existing roof drains are not plugged or partially blocked.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at

penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer

has passed.

4. Verify that lightweight insulating concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test

for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

6. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.

B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation

according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

C. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or

migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place

or when rain is forecast.

D. Clean areas to be covered with Thermoplastic Membrane of all debris and deleterious materials

including, wet insulation, damaged decking, gravel, grease, and bird droppings according to membrane

manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. Remove loose gravel by power broom cleaning or vacuum.

E. Clean surfaces of roof and maintain free from all deleterious material during roofing operations.

F. Remove all unused accessories. Verify requirements with Owner’s Representative.

Page 164: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 12

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

G. Metal Deck: Verify flatness and integrity of existing decking.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Ensure existing roof deck is clean and dry.

B. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components, so insulation is not exposed to

precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

C. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof

insulation.

D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

E. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where

overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each

succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

1. Minimum Total Insulation Thickness: 1 ½-inch insulation sloping to achieve minimum ¼-inch per foot slope and ¼-inch slope to roof drains, as indicated in the Drawings.

F. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not

restrict flow of water.

G. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered

between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

H. Lay tapered boards for a distance of 36-inches back from roof drains for positive drainage.

I. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:

1. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive.

J. Apply no more insulation and cant strips than can be sealed with membrane in same day.

3.4 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install thermoplastic roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written

instructions and applicable recommendations of NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the

Application of Roofing."

B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical

personnel.

C. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing.

Page 165: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 13

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5036.

D. Accurately align roofing membranes, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps of

minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

E. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing

built-up roofing system.

F. Coordinate installing roofing system components, so insulation and roofing membrane sheets are not

exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and

insulation with a course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed.

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from

entering completed sections of roofing system.

3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

G. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering

completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and

discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

H. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent adhesives from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or

damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction.

3.5 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Bonding Adhesive: Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing

membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing

membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane.

B. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and

perimeter of roofing.

C. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

D. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing

membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges

of roofing membrane.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet requirements.

E. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane

in place with clamping ring.

Page 166: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 14

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

F. 3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply flashing membrane to seal deck membrane to vertical elements in accordance with selected

membrane system manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to

membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and

allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.

D. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing.

E. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps

to ensure a watertight seam installation.

F. Inspect flashing seams and repair unsealed locations, voids, and fishmouths.

G. Coordinate installation of roof drains, scuppers, sumps, and related flashings.

H. Scuppers: Install prefabricated, custom roof scuppers as indicated. Terminate outside lining with

termination bar and heat weld inside skirt to membrane. Apply sealant to underside of lining and top or

termination bar.

I. Expansion Joints: Install prefabricated custom expansion joints as indicated. Seal to deck membrane

and vertical surface as required for flashings.

J. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination

bars.

3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere

walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s

written instructions.

1. Locations: Where indicated and at each rooftop exhaust fan unit with operable components, at

base and top of each roof ladder, and at each roof hatch.

2. Install pads adjacent to each exhaust fan access panel; roof ladder, and on three (3) sides of

each roof hatch; or match width of access panel, ladder, or hatch plus 12-inches each side. Set

joints 6-inches apart.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform

roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

Page 167: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 15

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality

Control”.

C. Upon substantial completion, Owner may have Work inspected using infrared scanning and other

appropriate means to establish conditions of completed Project.

D. Correct identified defects or irregularities. Cut out and repair membrane defects before end of each

day.

E. Do not perform demolition during roofing operations.

F. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect

roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.

1. Notify Architect or Owner 72 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.

2. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or

inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

G. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance

of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.9 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Provide manufacturer's field services under provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Control”.

B. Request site attendance of roofing materials manufacturers during installation of the work.

1. Frequency: Minimum of two (2) visits to project site each month during critical stages of

installation,

2. Coordination: Schedule visits to coincide with visits by Architect.

3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Where traffic must continue over finished roof installation, protect surfaces.

1. Minimum Protection: Cushion layer of insulation, minimum 1/2-inch thick, and one layer of

plywood minimum 3/4-inch thick. Ballast plywood for site and personnel protection.

B. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and

damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

C. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements,

repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

Page 168: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 16

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

D. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by adhesives, asphalt, or any other source of soiling caused

by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their

documented instructions.

E. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this Section.

F. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

3.11 FINAL TOUCH UP

A. Upon completion of all roof systems, flashing, accessory work and sheet metal applications, apply two

coats of approved aluminum roof coating to accessories not replaced and items as directed by Owner’s

Representative.

1. Paint existing pipes, drain strainers, metal vents, and other accessories with Type I aluminum

roof coating.

2. Apply at recommended rate, or at a minimum rate of ¾- to 1-gallon/square.

END OF SECTION

Page 169: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories:

1. Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fasciae.

2. Copings; pre-finished galvanized metal

3. Metal flashing.

4. Reglets.

5. Counterflashing.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 01 Section 01450 – Windstorm Requirements

2. Division 04 Sections for through-wall flashing and other integral masonry flashings specified

as part of masonry work.

3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants.

4. Division 07 Roofing Sections for flashing and roofing accessories installed integral with

roofing membrane as part of roofing-system work.

5. Division 22, 23 and 26 for manufactured curbs/supports and penetrations provided by

Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing contractors to be installed by this section.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,

thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.

B. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with requirements of the Texas Windstorm

Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and

Division 01 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general

recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product.

C. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage

Page 170: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

details.

D. Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish

involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units

showing the full range of variations expected.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and

trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of

successful in-service performance.

B. Mockups: Prior to installing sheet metal flashing and trim, construct mockups indicated to verify

selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of

materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials

indicated for final unit of Work.

1. Construct mockups for the following type of sheet metal flashing and trim:

a. Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fasciae.

b. Copings.

2. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each

installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials

and finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 90 (ASTM A 526M, Z 275), commercial quality, or

ASTM A 527, G 90 (ASTM A 527M, Z 275), lock-forming quality, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet

with 0.20 percent copper, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; not less than 0.0396 inch

(1.0 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. All exposed trim flashing, fascia, and components shall

be manufactured from pre-finished metal provided by Berridge Company to match metal roof panels.

2.2 REGLETS

A. General: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of

separate reglet and counterflashing pieces and compatible with flashing indicated.

B. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other

suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

Page 171: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

C. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to match thickness

of applied finish materials.

D. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.

E. Flexible Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in

reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings

show reglet without metal counterflashing.

F. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent

wind uplift of the counterflashing lower edge.

1. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick.

G. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Fry Reglet Corporation.

2. Hickman: W.P. Hickman Co.

3. Keystone Flashing Company.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, used with rosin flux.

B. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet

metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing

no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.

D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of

components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in

Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

F. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-

resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal.

G. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square (0.244 kg/sq. m) red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-

B-790, Type I, Style 1b.

H. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units

as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed;

noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.

I. Gutter Screen: 1/4-inch (6-mm) hardware cloth installed in sheet metal frames. Fabricate screen and

frame of same basic material as gutters and downspouts.

Page 172: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

J. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with

recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design,

dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.

B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in

waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of

surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and

that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,

form seams, and solder.

E. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed

within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion

provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form

expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with

mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant

to comply with SMACNA standards.

G. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at

locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by

manufacturer.

H. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on

faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.

I. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being

anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.

1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but

never less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.5 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance

requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal.

B. Exposed Trim, Gravel Stops, and Fasciae: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Pre-finished Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.

Page 173: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

C. Copings: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Galvalume finished Galvanized Steel: 0.0396 inch (1.0 mm) thick. Match brick color.

D. Exposed to view Counterflashing, Flashing Receivers, Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following

material:

1. Pre-finished Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick.

E. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.

F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft. (16 mm thick), hard tempered.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and

verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with

performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for

thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and

level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and

weatherproof.

B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and

that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet

metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant

performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

C. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data

Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone.

D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space

movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of

corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used

or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing

hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within

joints).

Page 174: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 6

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

E. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of

sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except where pretinned surface would show

in finished Work.

1. Do not solder to coil-coated galvanized steel sheet.

2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint.

Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant

to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal

sealant.

1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.

G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,

form seams, and solder.

H. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed

surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended

by manufacturer.

I. Install reglets to receive counterflashing according to the following requirements:

1. Where reglets are shown in masonry, furnish reglets for installation under Division 04 Section

"Unit Masonry."

J. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of assemblies to be

protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashing in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof

manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded

seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and

bed with sealant.

K. Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives,

and anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the

most efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roof-drainage system

installation. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep-sloped roofs with roofing

installation.

L. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and

equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member.

M. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and

installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:

1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with

flashing.

2. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping.

N. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, arranged as hinged units to

swing open for cleaning gutters.

Page 175: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 7

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or

deterioration of finishes.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work

during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of

Substantial Completion.

3.4 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES

A. All exposed finishes shall be Berridge, Pre-finished metallic; as selected by Architect.

END OF SECTION

Page 176: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND
Page 177: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROOF ACCESSORIES Section 07 72 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Roof curbs.

2. Equipment supports.

3. Roof hatches.

4. Telescoping Post.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for ladders and miscellaneous metal framing and

supports.

2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing, wood cants, and wood nailers.

3. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal

flashing and counterflashing, scuppers, fasciae, valleys, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim

and accessories.

4. Division 07 Sections for roofing accessories included as part of roofing Work.

5. Division 09 Section "Painting" for shop primers and field painting.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, materials,

dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,

required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other Work.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including

flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated.

2. NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installing units.

Page 178: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROOF ACCESSORIES Section 07 72 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Roof Curbs and Equipment Supports:

a. Curbs Plus, Inc.

b. Custom Curb, Inc.

c. Pate Co.(The).

d. ThyCurb, Inc.

2. Roof Hatches:

a. Bilco Company.

b. Milcor, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M with G90 (Z275) coating designation; commercial

quality, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Structural Quality: Grade 40 (Grade 275), where indicated or as required for strength.

B. Plastic Sheet: Unless additional thickness is required for light transmittances, provide glazing plastic

sheet thickness required for 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa) external and 20-lbf/sq. ft. (0.95-kPa) internal

loading pressures as recommended by the manufacturer for the size and shape indicated.

1. Acrylic: ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, cell-cast or continuous-cast acrylic (methacrylate),

Category A-1 or A-2, Type UVA containing ultraviolet absorber, with smooth or polished

Finish 1, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Polycarbonate: Thermoformable, monolithic polycarbonate sheets manufactured by the

extrusion process, burglar-resistance rated per UL 972 with average impact strength of 16 ft-

lbf/in. (850 J/m) of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Method A (Izod).

C. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid glass-fiber board of thickness indicated.

D. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground

use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.

E. Security Grilles: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter, hardened steel bars spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. in

one direction and 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. in the other. Weld bar intersections and ends of bars to

structural frame or primary curb walls. Clean and paint with rust-inhibitive metal primer.

F. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive

metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material

being fastened.

1. Where removing exterior exposed fasteners affords access to building, provide nonremovable

fastener heads.

Page 179: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROOF ACCESSORIES Section 07 72 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

G. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat

design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and

containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coating.

I. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.

J. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint

surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to joint

substrates indicated, O.

K. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel

application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.

2.3 ROOF CURBS

A. General: Provide roof curbs capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including

equipment loads and other construction to be supported on roof curbs. Coordinate dimensions with

rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

B. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum

0.0747-inch- (1.9-mm-) thick, structural-quality, hot-dip galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated

steel sheet; factory primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints.

C. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum

0.063-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, sheet aluminum with welded corner joints.

1. Provide preservative-treated wood nailers at tops of curbs and formed flange at perimeter

bottom for mounting to roof.

2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.

3. Provide manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid insulation where indicated.

4. Provide formed cants and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness.

5. Fabricate units to minimum height of 8 inches (200 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

6. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1/4 inch per foot (1:48), fabricate curb

units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of

units.

2.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide equipment supports capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads,

including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Coordinate dimensions with

rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

B. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum

0.0747-inch- (1.9-mm-) thick, structural-quality, hot-dip galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated

steel sheet; factory primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints.

Page 180: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROOF ACCESSORIES Section 07 72 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

C. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum

0.063-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, sheet aluminum with welded corner joints.

1. Provide preservative-treated wood nailers at tops of curbs and formed flange at perimeter

bottom for mounting to roof.

2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.

3. Fabricate units to minimum height of 8 inches (200 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

4. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1/4 inch per foot (1:48), fabricate support

units with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units.

2.5 ROOF HATCHES

A. Unit: 36 x 30 inch size (hinged on the 30 inch size), single leaf type.

B. Integral Steel Curb: 14 gauge prime painted galvanized steel with 1 inch rigid glass fiber insulation;

integral cap flashing to receive roof flashing; extended flange for mounting.

C. Flush Steel Cover: 14 gauge prime painted galvanized steel; 1 inch glass fiber insulation;

sandwiched by 22 gauge steel interior liner; continuous gasket to provide weatherproof seal.

D. Hardware:

1. Compression spring operator and shock absorbers.

2. Steel manual pull handle for interior and exterior operation.

3. Steel hold open arm with vinyl covered grip handle for easy release.

4. Components shall be zinc plated and chromate sealed.

5. Padlock hasp.

6. Heavy pintle hinges.

E. Telescoping Safety Post:

1. Bilco Model LU-2.

2. Install on fixed ladder below each hatch cover. Device shall be hot dip galvanized steel. It

shall be designed with telescoping tubular section that locks automatically when fully

extended. Upward and downward movement shall be controlled by a stainless steel spring

balancing mechanism. Unit shall be completely assembled with fasteners for securing to the

ladder rungs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Material: Galvanized steel.

1. Finish: Prime painted.

G. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1/4 inch per foot (1:48), fabricate hatch curbs with

height tapered to match slope to level tops of units.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

Page 181: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROOF ACCESSORIES Section 07 72 00 - 5

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the

same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they

are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other

contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied

over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint

specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.

1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,

complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply

the air-dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer per Division 9 Section "Painting."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof

accessories with installation of roof deck, roof insulation, flashing, roofing membranes, penetrations,

equipment, and other construction involving roof accessories to ensure that each element of the Work

performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof

accessories securely to supporting structural substrates so they are capable of withstanding lateral

and thermal stresses, and inward and outward loading pressures.

B. Install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA's "Roofing and

Waterproofing Manual," unless otherwise indicated,

C. Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by

coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other

permanent separation.

D. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing

cement to form a seal.

Page 182: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

ROOF ACCESSORIES Section 07 72 00 - 6

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

E. Cap Flashing: Where required as component of accessory, install cap flashing to provide waterproof

overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal overlap with thick bead of mastic

sealant.

F. Operational Units: Test-operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and

hardware. Adjust for proper operation.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal

coatings.

END OF SECTION

Page 183: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

JOINT SEALANTS Section 07 92 00 - 1

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. In addition to product data submit the following:

1. Samples of each type and color of joint sealant required.

2. Certified test reports for joint sealants evidencing compliance with requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPATIBILITY

A. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and

with joint substrates under service and application conditions, as demonstrated by testing and field

experience.

2.2 COLORS

A. Provide color indicated of exposed joint sealants or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect

from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANT STANDARD

A. Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated

complying with ASTM C920 requirements.

1. One-Part, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and as follows:

a. Uses NT, M, G, A, and O.

b. Products: Trimco Spectrem 1 or Sika - SikaSil WS-290

2. Multi-Part, Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and as follows:

a. Uses NT, M, A, and O.

b. Dymeric Manufactured by Trimco or NP-2 by Sonneborn.

3. One-Part, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type S, Grade P, Class 25, and as follows:

a. Uses T, M, A, and O. **Dymonic manufactured by Trimco or NP-1 by Sonneborn.

4. One-Part Pourable Polyurethane Sealant, Nonsagging as Follows:

a. Uses: Walkways and Traffic Paving

b. SL-1 by Sonneborn.

5. Security Sealant: Dynaflex by Pecora; Elastomenic Polyurethane Joint Sealant; ASTM C902-86;

Two-Part Nonsagging Cold Applied; Shore A-55 Plus Tamper and Abuse-Resistant Sealant.

Page 184: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

JOINT SEALANTS Section 07 92 00 - 2

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

2.4 BUTYL SEALANT

A. Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying

with ASTM C 1085 and formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids to be nonstaining, paintable, and

have a tack-free time of 24 hours or less. Black color; butyl sealant by Tnemec.

2.5 ACRYLIC-EMULSION SEALANT

A. One-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable, acrylic-emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing

airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as

demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90.

2.7 TAPE SEALANT

A. Solvent-free, butyl-based tape sealant with a solids content of 100 percent formulated to be nonstaining,

paintable, and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces with or without reinforcement thread to

prevent stretch and packaged on rolls with release paper on one side.

2.8 SEALANT BACKINGS, GENERAL

A. Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; approved for

applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

1. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of

plastic foam of material indicated below, and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth

and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

a. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in

unruptured state.

2. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with

ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures

down to -26 deg F (-32 deg C).

3. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant and joint filler or other materials at back of

joint.

2.9 PRIMER

A. As recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates

indicated.

Page 185: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

JOINT SEALANTS Section 07 92 00 - 3

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and

recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release and C790 for latex base sealants.

E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.

B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.

C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width.

D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant

cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges and sags.

G. Tool joints concave.

H. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1193.

I. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical

applications.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING

A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700 “Contract Closeout”.

Page 186: SECTION 02 41 13.13 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND … · A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 ... CONCRETE FORMWORK AND

JOINT SEALANTS Section 07 92 00 - 4

White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022

Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018

B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work in this Section.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500 “Construction Facilities and Temporary

Controls”.

B. Protect sealants until cured.

3.6 SCHEDULE

Location Type Color

A. Window Perimeter: Silicone, Gray or Bronze -

Single Component to match frame

B. Brick, Plaster, and Concrete

Masonry:

Silicone, Color as Selected –

Single Component by Architect

C. Door Frame / Walls: Silicone – Single Component Color to Suit Condition

D. Under Thresholds Butyl Rubber Black

E. Plumbing Fixtures / Ceramic

Tile Silicone, Fungus Resistant White

F. All Other Interior Acrylic Latex Joints Color to Suit Condition

G. Building Expansion Joint Polyurethane, Color as

Selected – Multi-Components by Architect

END OF SECTION